Service Manual NP215s NP216

SAFETY CAUTION:
Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service

technician read and follow the Safety Precautions and Product
Safety Notice in this Service Manual.
WARNING:
SHOCK HAZARD - Use an isolation transformer when servicing.
PART No. 3N9911161 (1st Edition)
Portable Projector
SERVICE MANUAL
Better Service
Better Reputation
Better Proft
MODEL NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110
NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G
NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J
NP216+/NP215+/NP210+/NP115+/NP110+
NEC DISPLAY SOLUTIONS, LTD.
Copyright Cautions for Maintenance Service
1. Contents 2. Safety precautions 3. User's manual
4. Troubleshooting 5. Method of adjustments 6. Serviceman mode
7. Cleaning 8. Circuit sescrition 9. Method of disassembly
10. Disassembly 11. Packaging 12. Part list
13. Connection diagram 14. Block diagram 15. Schematic diagrams
Back cover
(1) Copyright (C) NEC Display Solutions, Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
This document contains confdential information.
Unauthorized copying, duplication, distribution, or
republication is strictly prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change
without prior notice.
Cautions for Maintenance Services
1. How to start the set under the condition that the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are
removed
The Lamp Cover switch (COVER PWB ASSY) of this model is mounted on the top of the Power Case.
The set cannot be started if the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are left removed.
This is because the Lamp Cover switch can be turned OFF only if the LAMP COVER ASSY is removed.
Follow the steps shown below when intending to start up the set under the condition that the LAMP
COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are removed.
1 Provide for carton (or cardboard paper)
Length: 30 ~ 40 (mm), Depth: 50 ~ 60 (mm), Thickness: 2 ~ 3 (mm)
2 Insert the carton (or cardboard paper) in the right side of the Lamp Cover switch.
(Insert it along the Lamp Cover switch.)
Caution: Under the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY and LAMP COVER ASSY are removed, the
set can be started by the method described above. However, the set cannot be started under
the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY only is mounted and the LAMP COVER ASSY is
removed.
2. Cautions for the installation of LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY
When installing the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY on the set, the TOP COVER ASSY only
should be mounted frst. Then, the LAMP COVER ASSY can be mounted.
If the installation work is carried out in the state that the LAMP COVER ASSY is mounted on the TOP
COVER ASSY, the Lamp Cover switch may be damaged by the embossed part of the LAMP COVER
ASSY.

ON by PUSH
LAMP COVER SWITCH
Insert the carton
Insert it in the red
frame section.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................................... 2-1
USERS MANUAL ..................................................................................................................................................1
Important Information (U)
Quick Setup Guide (U/G)
Quic Setup Guide (G2)
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Operational checks ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Power block .................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
I/O Sync and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110) ......................................................... 4-3
I/O Sync and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP216) ........................................................................................... 4-5
DMD Driver Block ........................................................................................................................................... 4-8
AWired LAN .................................................................................................................................................. 4-10
Audio block (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110) .............................................................................4-11
Audio block (Applicable to NP216) ............................................................................................................... 4-12
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 5-1
PC control software for service ...................................................................................................................... 5-1
Model-Specifc Data Writing Procedure for NP215 Series ........................................................................... 5-16
Optical Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................... 5-22
SERVICEMAN MODE ......................................................................................................................................... 6-1
CLEANING .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 8-1
I/O terminals (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110) ............................................................................. 8-1
I/O terminals (Applicable to NP216) ............................................................................................................... 8-1
Input signals ................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Circuit operation ............................................................................................................................................. 8-3
A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110) ............................................. 8-6
A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP216) ............................................................................... 8-7
Power Up Sequence ...................................................................................................................................... 8-8
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY ............................................................................................................................ 9-1
DISASSEMBLY ................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
Main body (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110) ............................................................................. 10-1
Main body (Applicable to NP216) ................................................................................................................ 10-2
Engine sassy ................................................................................................................................................ 10-3
PACKAGING ......................................................................................................................................................11-1
PART LIST ........................................................................................................................................................ 12-1
NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110 ....................................................................................................................... 12-1
NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G ............................................................................................. 12-6
NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J .................................................................................................12-11
CONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................ 13-1
BLOCK DIAGRAM ............................................................................................................................................ 14-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................................. 15-1
1-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2-1
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit
may have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is
dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this unit has been included.
Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems.
ATTENTION
RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE
PAS DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N' Y A AUCUNE PIECE
UTILISABLE A L'INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE CONFIER
LES TRAVAUX D'ENTRETIEN QU'A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE.
Ce symbole a pour but de prvenir I' utilisateur de la prsence d'
une tension dangereuse, non isole se trouvant l' intrieur de l'
appareil. Elle est d' une intensit suffsante pour constituer un risque
d' lectrocution. Eviter le contact avec les pices l' intrieur de cet
appareil.
Ce symbole a pour but de prvenir l' utilisateur de la prsence d'
importantes instructions concernant l' entretien et le fonctionnement de
cet appareil. Par consquent, elles doivent tre lues attentivement afn
d' viter des problmes.
WARNING
HEATSINK MAY BE ENERGIZED.
TEST BEFORE TOUCHING.
Heat sink located on the power board, is electrifed.
mark is putted on the primary heat sink.
Pay attention to this area.
2-2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
During servicing carefully observe the following.
1. OBSERVE ALL PRECAUTIONS
Items and locations that require special care during
serv-icing, such as the cabinet, chassis, and parts are
labelled with individual safety instructions. Carefully
comply with these instructions and all precautions in
the instruction manual.
2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
The chassis carries an AC voltage. If you touch the
chassis while it is still alive, you will get a severe
shock. If you think the chassis is alive, use an isolating
transformer or gloves, or pull out the plug before
replacing any parts.
3. USE SPECIFIED PARTS
The components have been chosen for minimum
fammability and for specifc levels of resistance value
and wi thstand vol tage. Repl acement parts must
match these original specifications. Parts whose
specifications are particularly vital to safe use and
maintenance of the set are marked on the circuit
diagrams and parts list.
Substitution of these parts can be dangerous for you
and the customer, so use only specifed parts.
4. REMOUNT ALL PARTS AND RECONNECT ALL
WIRES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED
For saf et y, i nsul at i ng t ape and t ubes are used
throughout, but some lift-off parts on the printed wiring
board require special attention.
All wires are positioned away from high-temperature
and high-voltage parts, and, if removed for servicing,
they must be retuned preci sel y to thei r ori gi nal
positions.
5. LAMP
Be very careful of the lamp because it generates high
heat while it is used at high voltage. When replacing
the bulb, make sure it is cool enough.
6. LENS
Do not l ook i nto the l ens duri ng proj ecti on. Thi s
important to avoid damage to the eyes.
7. SERVICING
At the time of repair or inspection services, use an
earth band (wrist band), without fail.
8. RUN A COMPLETE SAFETY CHECK AT THE
COMPLETION OF SERVICING
Af t er compl et i on of ser vi ci ng, conf i r m t hat al l
screws, parts, and wiring, removed or disconnected
for servicing, have been returned to their original
positions. Also examine if the serviced sections and
peripheral areas have suffered from any deterioration
as a result of servicing. In addition, check insulation
between external metallic parts and blades of wall-
outlet plugs. This examination is indispensable in
confrming complete establishment of safety.
(Insulation check)
Pull out a plug from a wall outlet to disconnect the
connection cable. Then turn on the POWER switch.
Use a 500V megger (Note 2) and confirm that the
insulation resistance is 1M or more between each
terminal of the plug and exposed external metal (Note
1). If the measured value is below the specifed level,
then it is necessary to inspect and fx the set.
(Note 1)
Exposed external metal....RGB input terminals, control
terminals, etc.
(Note 2)
If a 500V megger is not available for an unavoidable
reason, then use a circuit tester or the like for inspection.
Portable Projector
NP216/NP215/NP210/
NP115/NP110
Users Manual
The NP210 is not distributed in North America.
3rd edition, April 2010
DLP and BrilliantColor are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
IBM is a trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Macintosh, Mac OS X and PowerBook are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 7, Windows Vista, and PowerPoint are either a registered trademark or trademark
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
MicroSaver is a registered trademark of Kensington Computer Products Group, a division of ACCO Brands.
XPAND is a trademark of X6D Ltd.
Other product and company names mentioned in this users manual may be the trademarks or registered trade-
marks of their respective holders.
NOTES
(1) The contents of this users manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission.
(2) The contents of this users manual are subject to change without notice.
(3) Great care has been taken in the preparation of this users manual; however, should you notice any question-
able points, errors or omissions, please contact us.
(4) Notwithstanding article (3), NEC will not be responsible for any claims on loss of profit or other matters
deemed to result from using the Projector.
i
Important Information
Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector and keep
the manual handy for future reference.
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufcient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNITS PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-
tions.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,
The highest sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) in accordance with EN ISO 7779.
Disposing of your used product
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handling the cables supplied with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic
products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This in-
cludes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please
follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product.
After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us
reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human
health and the environment at the minimum level.
The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member
States.
ii
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specied by NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regu-
lation could void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (ve Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent re and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
Do not place the projector in the following conditions:
- on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
- near water, baths, or damp rooms.
- in direct sunlight, near heaters, or heat radiating appliances.
- in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment.
- on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets.
If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
- Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
- The projector must be installed by qualied technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk
of bodily injury.
- In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance
with any local building codes.
- Please consult your dealer for more information.
WARNING
Do not cover the lens with the lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of
the cap due to the heat emitted from the light output.
Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens. Doing so could lead
to the object melting from the heat that is emitted from the light output.

iii
Fire and Shock Precautions
Ensure that there is suffcient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the front side as it can become heated while the projector is turned on
and immediately after the projector is turned off.

Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to retrieve
any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver into
your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object removed
by a qualied service personnel.
Do not place any objects on top of the projector.
Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fre.
The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply
ts this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.

Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause
unpredictable outcome such as re or injury to the eyes.
Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of a projector exhaust vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the
exhaust.
Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or fre.
- Do not use any power cables than the supplied one.
- Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively.
- Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object.
- Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs.
- Do not heat the power cable.
- Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the projector serviced by a qualifed service personnel
under the following conditions:
- When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed.
- If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.
10
Place the projector in a horizontal position
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other
than the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
iv
- If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user's manual.
- If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
- If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector.
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp.
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable if the projector is not to be used for an extended period of
time.
When using a LAN cable (NP216/NP215 only):
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage.
CAUTION
Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or
hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside the
soft case could be damaged.
Select [HIGH] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[SETUP] [OPTIONS(1)] [FAN MODE] [HIGH].)
Do not turn off the AC power for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blink-
ing green.
Doing so could cause premature lamp failure.
Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if
the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation.
Use caution when picking up the projector.
Remote Control Precautions
Handle the remote control carefully.
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fre.
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.
Ensure that you have the batteries' polarity (+/) aligned correctly.
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Lamp Replacement
Use the specifed lamp for safety and performance.
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page 70.
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE.
PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end
of its usable life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch
them as the pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source.
A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on
and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.
v
CAUTION:
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off
and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before handling.
When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass
fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.
Note for US Residents
The lamp in this product contains mercury. Please dispose according to Local, State or Fed-
eral Laws.
Health precautions to users viewing 3D images
Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the users manual included with
your LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video
les and the like.
To avoid any adverse symptoms, heed the following:
- Do not use LCD shutter eyeglasses for viewing any material other than 3D images.
- Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close
a distance can strain your eyes.
- Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every
hour of viewing.
- If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing
3D images.
- While viewing 3D images, if you get sick such as nausea, dizziness, queasiness, headache, eyestrain, blurry
vision, convulsions, and numbness, stop viewing them. If symptoms still persist, consult a doctor.
About High Altitude mode
Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters
or higher.
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]
can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and
turn on the projector.
Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]
can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to ficker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical com-
ponents such as the lamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures:
Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue
such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with the following func-
tions may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.
[ASPECT RATIO], [KEYSTONE], Magnifying feature and other similar features.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market
EEE Yonetmeliine Uygundur.
This device is not intended for use in the direct eld of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid incommoding reec-
tions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct eld of view.
vi
Table of Contents
Important Information ............................................................................................i
Table of Contents .................................................................................................... vi
1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1
@ Whats in the Box? ......................................................................................................... 1
@ Introduction to the Projector .......................................................................................... 2
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector ................................................. 2
Features you'll enjoy: ............................................................................................... 2
About this user's manual .......................................................................................... 3
@ Part Names of the Projector .......................................................................................... 4
Front/Top .................................................................................................................. 4
Rear ......................................................................................................................... 4
Top Features ............................................................................................................ 5
Terminal Panel Features .......................................................................................... 6
@ Part Names of the Remote Control ............................................................................... 7
Battery Installation ................................................................................................... 8
Remote Control Precautions .................................................................................... 8
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control ........................................................ 8
2. Installation and Connections ..................................................................... 9
@ Setting Up the Screen and the Projector ....................................................................... 9
Selecting a Location................................................................................................. 9
Throw Distance and Screen Size ........................................................................... 10
@ Making Connections .................................................................................................... 12
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer ......................................................... 12
Connecting an External Monitor ............................................................................ 13
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output ........................................... 14
Connecting Your VCR............................................................................................. 15
Connecting to a Network (NP216/NP215 only)...................................................... 16
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable .................................................................. 17
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) .............................................. 18
@ Turning on the Projector .............................................................................................. 18
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen) ...................................... 19
@ Selecting a Source ...................................................................................................... 20
Selecting the computer or video source................................................................. 20
@ Adjusting the Picture Size and Position ....................................................................... 21
Adjust the Tilt Foot ................................................................................................. 22
Zoom ...................................................................................................................... 23
Focus ..................................................................................................................... 23
@ Correcting Keystone Distortion .................................................................................... 24
Correcting Keystone Distortion .............................................................................. 24
Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet .................................................................... 24
Adjusting with the remote control ........................................................................... 25
@ Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically ................................................................. 26
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust .................................................................. 26
@ Turning Up or Down Volume ........................................................................................ 26
vii
Table of Contents
@ Turning off the Projector .............................................................................................. 27
@ After Use...................................................................................................................... 28
4. Convenient Features ..................................................................................... 29
@ Turning off the Image and Sound ................................................................................ 29
@ Freezing a Picture ....................................................................................................... 29
@ Enlarging a Picture ...................................................................................................... 29
@ Changing Eco Mode .................................................................................................... 30
@ Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER] ................................................... 31
@ Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY] ...................................... 32
@ Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR) ............................................ 35
@ Network Setting by Using an HTTP Browser (NP216/NP215 only) ............................. 37
@ Viewing 3D Images ...................................................................................................... 40
5. Using On-Screen Menu ................................................................................ 43
@ Using the Menus .......................................................................................................... 43
@ Menu Elements ............................................................................................................ 44
@ List of Menu Items ....................................................................................................... 45
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE] ................................................................ 47
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST] .................................................................. 48
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP] .................................................................... 55
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.] ...................................................................... 66
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET] .................................................................... 68
6. Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 69
@ Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens ............................................................................. 69
@ Replacing the Lamp..................................................................................................... 70
7. Appendix ............................................................................................................... 73
@ Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 73
Indicator Messages ................................................................................................ 73
@ Specications .............................................................................................................. 76
@ Cabinet Dimensions .................................................................................................... 78
@ Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector .......................................... 79
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector ................................................................................ 79
@ Compatible Input Signal List ........................................................................................ 80
@ PC Control Codes and Cable Connection ................................................................... 81
PC Control Codes .................................................................................................. 81
Cable Connection .................................................................................................. 81
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P) ........................................................................ 81
@ Troubleshooting Check List .......................................................................................... 82
@ TravelCare Guide ......................................................................................................... 84
1
1. Introduction
1 Whats in the Box?
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
Projector
Lens cap
(24F45801)
Power cable
(US: 7N080236)
(EU: 7N080022)
VGA signal cable
(7N520073)
NEC Projector CD-ROM
Users manual
(7N951472)
For North America only
Registration card
Limited warranty
For customers in Europe:
You will fnd our current valid Guarantee
Policy on our Web Site:
www.nec-display-solutions.com
For North America
Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731)
Important Information (7N8N0752)
For other countries than North
America
Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731 and
7N8N0741)
Important Information (7N8N0752
and 7N8N0762)
Remote control
(7N900881)
Batteries (AAAx2)
2
1. Introduction
@ Introduction to the Projector
This section introduces you to your new projector and describes the features and controls.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector
This DLP
projector is one of the very best projectors available today. The projector enables you to project precise
images up to 300 inches (measured diagonally) from your PC or Macintosh computer (desktop or notebook), VCR,
DVD player or document camera.
You can use the projector on a tabletop or cart, you can use the projector to project images from behind the screen,
and the projector can be permanently mounted on a ceiling*1. The remote control can be used wirelessly.
*1 Do not attempt to mount the projector on a ceiling yourself.
The projector must be installed by qualied technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily
injury.
In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any
local building codes. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Features you'll enjoy:
Quick start & Quick Power Off
7 seconds after turning on the power, the projector is ready to display PC or video images.
The projector can be put away immediately after the projector is powered down. No cool down period is required
after the projector is turned off from the remote control or cabinet control panel.
Direct Power Off
The projector has a feature called Direct Power Off. This feature allows the projector to be turned off (even when
projecting an image) by disconnecting the AC power supply.
To turn off the AC power supply when the projector is powered on, use a power strip equipped with a switch and
a breaker.
Less than 1W in standby condition with energy saving technology
Selecting [POWER-SAVING] for [STANDBY MODE] from the menu can put the projector in power-saving mode
that consumes only 0.49W (100-130V AC)/0.71W (200-240V AC).
Carbon Meter
This feature will show energy-saving effect in terms of CO2 emission reduction (kg) when the projectors [ECO
MODE] is set to [ON].
The amount of CO2 emission reduction will be displayed in the conrmation message at the time of power-off and
in the INFO of the on-screen menu.
7W built-in speaker for an integrated audio solution
Powerful 7 watt speaker provides volume need for large rooms.
Two computer inputs provided (NP216 only)
The NP216 projector comes with two computer input ports (Mini D-Sub15P) with audio inputs (two stereo mini
jacks) as well as composite and S-video inputs with audio inputs (a pair of L/R RCA jacks).
DLP
projector with high resolution and high brightness

High resolution display - up to UXGA compatible, XGA (NP216/NP215/NP210)/ SVGA (NP115/NP110) native
resolution.
AUTO POWER ON and AUTO POWER OFF features
The AUTO POWER ON(AC), AUTO POWER ON(COMP.), AUTO POWER OFF, and OFF TIMER features eliminate
the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or projector cabinet.
3
1. Introduction
Preventing unauthorized use of the projector
Enhanced smart security settings for keyword protection, cabinet control panel lock, security slot, chain opening
to help prevent unauthorized access, adjustments and theft deterrence.
The supplied remote control allows you to assign a CONTROL ID to the projector
Multiple projectors can be operated separately and independently with the same single remote control by assigning
an ID number to each projector.
Integrated RJ-45 connector for wired networking capacity (NP216/NP215 only)
An RJ-45 connector is equipped as standard feature.
3D images supported
The projector provides 3D images to a user wearing commercially available DLP Link compatible LCD shutter
eyeglasses.
About this user's manual
The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do everything right the rst time. Take a few minutes now to
review the user's manual. This may save you time later on. At the beginning of each section of the manual you'll nd
an overview. If the section doesn't apply, you can skip it.
In this user's manual the drawings of the projector show an example of NP215.
4
1. Introduction
@ Part Names of the Projector
Zoom Lever
( page 23)
Controls
( page 5)
Lens
Lens Cap
Built-in Security Slot ( )*
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
( page 22)
Adjustable Tilt Foot
( page 22)
Remote Sensor
( page 8)
Front/Top
AC Input
Connect the supplied power
cable's three-pin plug here, and
plug the other end into an active
wall outlet. ( page 17)
Terminal Panel
( page 6)
Rear
* This security slot supports the MicroSaver Security System.
Ventilation (outlet)
Heated air is ex-
hausted from here.
Ventilation (inlet)
Lamp Cover
( page 71)
Focus Ring
( page 23)
Ventilation (inlet)
Monaural Speaker (7W)
Rear Foot
( page 22)
Security chain opening
Attach an anti-theft device.
The security chain opening accepts
security wires or chains up to 0.18
inch/4.6 mm in diameter.
Spacer (black rubber)
To ne-adjust the height of the rear
foot, remove the spacer and rotate
the rear foot to the desired height.
5
1. Introduction
Top Features
1. POWER Button (ON / STAND BY) ( ) ( page 18,
27)
2. POWER Indicator ( page 17, 18, 27, 73)
3. STATUS Indicator ( page 73)
4. LAMP Indicator ( page 70, 73)
5. AUTO ADJ. Button ( page 26)
6. SOURCE Button ( page 20)
7. MENU Button ( page 43)
8. / Keystone / Volume Buttons
( page 24, 26, 29)
9. ENTER Button
10. EXIT Button
7 8 9 10 5 6 1 2 3 4
6
1. Introduction
Terminal Panel Features
1. COMPUTER OUT Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)
( page 13)
2. COMPUTER IN/ Component Input Connector
(Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) ( page 12, 13, 14)
3. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA) ( page 15)
4. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin)
( page 15)
1. COMPUTER 1 IN/ Component Input Connector
AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) ( page 12, 13,
14)
2. COMPUTER 2 IN/ Component Input Connector
AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) ( page 12, 13,
14)
3. MONITOR OUT (COMP 1) Connector (Mini D-Sub
15 Pin) ( page 13)
AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) ( page 13)
5. AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)
( page 12, 13, 14, 15)
6. PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin) ( page 81)
Use this port to connect a PC or control system.
This enables you to control the projector using serial
communication protocol. If you are writing your own
program, typical PC control codes are on page 81.
7. LAN Port (RJ-45) (NP215 only) ( page 16)
4. PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin) ( page 81)
Use this port to connect a PC or control system.
This enables you to control the projector using serial
communication protocol. If you are writing your own
program, typical PC control codes are on page 81.
5. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin)
( page 15)
6. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA) ( page 15)
7. VIDEO/S-VIDEO AUDIO Input Jacks L/R (RCA)
( page 12, 13, 14, 15)
8. LAN Port (RJ-45) ( page 16)
1 2
2 1
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6 7
NP215
NP216
NP210/NP115/NP110
2 4 6 7 8
1 5
3
7
1. Introduction
3
7
5
6
1
2
10
12
13
11
14
9
4
8
26
27
28
16
17
22
24
25
21
15
20
19
18
23
29
@ Part Names of the Remote Control
1. Infrared Transmitter
( page 8)
2. POWER ON Button
( page 18)
3. POWER OFF Button
( page 27)
4, 5, 6. COMPUTER 1/2/3 Button
( page 20)
(COMPUTER 2/3 button is not available on NP215/
NP210/NP115/NP110. COMPUTER 3 button is not
available on NP216.)
7. AUTO ADJ. Button
( page 26)
8. VIDEO Button
( page 20)
9. S-VIDEO Button
( page 20)
10. VIEWER Button
(not available on this series of projectors)
11. ID SET Button
( page 60)
12. Numeric Keypad Button/CLEAR Button
( page 60)
13. FREEZE Button
( page 29)
14. AV-MUTE Button
( page 29)
15. MENU Button
( page 43)
16. EXIT Button ( page 43)
17. Button ( page 43)
18. ENTER Button ( page 43)
19. MAGNIFY (+)() Button
( page 29)
20. MOUSE L-CLICK Button*
( page 35, 36)
21. MOUSE R-CLICK Button*
( page 35, 36)
22. PAGE / Button*
( page 35, 36)
23. ECO MODE Button ( page 30)
24. KEYSTONE Button
( page 25)
25. PICTURE Button
( page 48, 49)
26. VOL. (+)() Button
( page 26)
27. ASPECT Button
( page 52)
28. FOCUS/ZOOM Button
(not available on this series of projectors)
29. HELP Button
( page 66)
* The PAGE /, MOUSE L-CLICK and MOUSE R-CLICK buttons work only when the optional remote mouse re-
ceiver (NP01MR) is connected with your computer.
8
1. Introduction
30
30
30
30
OPEN
Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fre.
Ensure that you have the batteries polarity (+/) aligned correctly.
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
1 Press rmly and slide the battery
cover off.
2 Install new batteries (AAA). Ensure
that you have the batteries polarity
(+/) aligned correctly.
The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of
the remote sensor on the projector cabinet.
The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls
on the sensor. Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.
Battery Installation
7 m/22 feet
7 m/22 feet
Remote control
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
OPEN
3 Slip the cover back over the bat-
teries until it snaps into place. Do
not mix different types of batteries
or new and old batteries.
Remote control
9
3
2
1
2. Installation and Connections
This section describes how to set up your projector and how to connect video and audio sources.
Your projector is simple to set up and use. But before you get started, you must rst:
@ Setting Up the Screen and the Projector
Selecting a Location
The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is 30"
(0.76 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 49 inches (1.3 m) from the wall or screen. The largest
the image can be is 300" (7.6 m) when the projector is about 493 inches (12.5 m) from the wall or screen. Use the
chart below as a rough guide.
_ Set up a screen and the projector.
Connect your computer or video equip-
ment to the projector. See pages 12, 13,
14, 15, 16.
_ Connect the supplied power cable. See
page 17.
NOTE: Ensure that the power cable and any other
cables are disconnected before moving the projec-
tor. When moving the projector or when it is not
in use, cover the lens with the lens cap.
NOTE:
The distances are indicated by intermediate values between tele and wide. Use as a rule of thumb.
The Zoom lever adjusts the image size up to +/-5%
For more details on throw distance, see next page.
To the wall outlet.
3
0
0
"
2
4
0
"
2
0
0
"
1
8
0
"
1
5
0
"
1
2
0
"
1
0
0
"
6
0
"
4
0
"
8
0
"
3
0
"
1
.7
m
/6
5
.5
"
2
.5
m
/9
8
.5
"
3
.3
m
/1
3
1
.5
"
4
.2
m
/1
6
4
"
5
.0
m
/1
9
7
"
6
.3
/2
4
6
"
7
.5
m
/2
9
5
.5
"
8
.3
m
/3
2
8
"
1
0
.0
m
/3
9
4
"
1
2
.5
m
/4
9
2
.5
"
D
is
t
a
n
c
e

(
U
n
it
:
m
/
in
c
h
)
Lens center
Screen Size (diagonal: inch)
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
609.6(W) x 457.2(H) / 240(W) x 180(H)
487.7(W) x 365.8(H) / 192(W) x 144(H)
406.4(W) x 304.8(H) / 160(W) x 120(H)
365.8(W) x 274.3(H) / 144(W) x 108(H)
304.8(W) x 228.6(H) / 120(W) x 90(H)
243.8(W) x 182.9(H) / 96(W) x 72(H)
203.2(W) x 152.4(H) / 80(W) x 60(H)
162.6(W) x 121.9(H) / 64(W) x 48(H)
121.9(W) x 91.4(H) / 48(W) x 36(H)
81.3(W) x 61.0(H) / 32(W) x 24(H)
1.3m
/49"
61.0(W) x 45.7(H) / 24(W) x 18(H)
10
Throw Distance and Screen Size
The following shows the proper relative positions of the projector and screen. Refer to the table to determine the
position of installation.
Distance Chart
C
D
B
Screen center
Lens center
Screen bottom
2.7"/68 mm
Installation surface
Screen Size
B
C
D(WIDE)
a
Diagonal Width Height Wide - Tele Wide - Tele
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm - inch mm inch mm degree - degree
30 762 24 610 18 457 12 297 46 1180 - 52 1320 3 69 14.0 - 12.7
40 1016 32 813 24 610 16 396 62 1573 - 69 1760 4 91 14.0 - 12.7
60 1524 48 1219 36 914 23 594 93 2360 - 104 2640 5 137 14.0 - 12.7
70 1778 56 1422 42 1067 27 693 108 2753 - 121 3080 6 160 14.0 - 12.7
80 2032 64 1626 48 1219 31 792 124 3147 - 139 3520 7 183 14.0 - 12.7
90 2286 72 1829 54 1372 35 891 139 3540 - 156 3960 8 206 14.0 - 12.7
100 2540 80 2032 60 1524 39 990 155 3933 - 173 4400 9 228 14.0 - 12.7
120 3048 96 2438 72 1829 47 1188 186 4720 - 208 5280 11 274 14.0 - 12.7
150 3810 120 3048 90 2286 58 1486 232 5900 - 260 6600 13 343 14.0 - 12.7
180 4572 144 3658 108 2743 70 1783 279 7080 - 312 7920 16 411 14.0 - 12.7
200 5080 160 4064 120 3048 78 1981 310 7867 - 346 8800 18 457 14.0 - 12.7
240 6096 192 4877 144 3658 94 2377 372 9440 - 416 10560 22 548 14.0 - 12.7
270 6858 216 5486 162 4115 105 2674 418 10620 - 468 11880 24 617 14.0 - 12.7
300 7620 240 6096 180 4572 117 2971 465 11800 - 520 13200 27 685 14.0 - 12.7
B = Vertical distance between lens center and screen center
C = Throw distance
D = Vertical distance between lens center and bottom of screen(top of screen for ceiling application)
= Throw angle
NOTE: The values in the tables are design values and may vary.
11
WARNING
* Installing your projector on the ceiling must be done
by a qualied technician. Contact your NEC dealer
for more information.
* Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
Only use your projector on a solid, level surface. If
the projector falls to the ground, you can be injured
and the projector severely damaged.
Do not use the projector where temperatures vary
greatly. The projector must be used at temperatures
between 41F (5C) and 104F (40C). ([ECO MODE]
is set automatically to [ON] at 95F to 104F/35C
to 40C. Note that [ECO] mode will be set to [ON]
automatically at 86F to 104F/30C to 40C when
used in [HIGH ALTITUDE].)
Do not expose the projector to moisture, dust, or
smoke. This will harm the screen image.
Ensure that you have adequate ventilation around
your projector so heat can dissipate. Do not cover
the vents on the side or the front of the projector.
Refecting the Image
Using a mirror to reect your projector's image enables
you to enjoy a much larger image when a smaller space
is required. Contact your NEC dealer if you need a mirror
system. If you're using a mirror system and your image
is inverted, use the MENU and buttons on your
projector cabinet or your remote control to correct the
orientation. ( page 59)
12
COMPUTER IN
PHONE
PHONE
AUDIO IN
@ Making Connections
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer
NOTE: When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode
and before turning on the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screen-saver or power manage-
ment software.
Enabling the computers external display
Displaying an image on the notebook PCs screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector.
When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the Fn key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on
or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through
external display selections.
VGA signal cable
(supplied)
To mini D-Sub 15-pin con-
nector on the projector. It is
recommended that you use a
commercially available distri-
bution amplier if connecting
a signal cable longer than
the cable supplied.
IBM VGA or Compatibles
(Notebook type) or Ma-
cintosh (Notebook type)
NOTE: For older Macintosh,
use a commercially available
pin adapter (not supplied)
to connect to your Mac's
video port.
Stereo mini-plug audio cable
(not supplied)
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
NP216
VGA signal cable
(supplied)
Stereo mini-plug audio
cable (not supplied)
NOTE:
Before connecting an audio cable to the headphone jack of a computer, adjust the computers volume level to low. After connecting
the projector to the computer, adjust the volume of both projector and computer to suitable level as desired to avoid damage to
your ear.
If an audio output jack of your computer is a mini jack type, connect the audio cable to it.
An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back via a commercially available scan converter.
This is because the projector will process a video signal as a computer signal at the default setting. In that case, do the following.
- When an image is displayed with the lower and upper black portion of the screen or a dark image is not displayed correctly:
Project an image to fll the screen and then press the AUTO ADJ. button on the remote control or the projector cabinet.
- NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: The COMPUTER IN connector supports Plug & Play (DDC2B).
NP216: Both the COMPUTER 1 IN and COMPUTER 2 IN connectors support Plug & Play (DDC2B).
13
Connecting an External Monitor
You can connect a separate, external monitor to your projector to simultaneously view on a monitor the computer
analog image youre projecting.
NOTE: Daisy chain connection is not possible.
PHONE
COMPUTER OUT
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
(COMP 1)
VGA signal
cable (sup-
plied)
VGA signal cable (not supplied)
NP216
VGA signal cable
(not supplied)
VGA signal cable
(supplied)
14
AUDIO IN
L R
AUDIO OUT
L R
Component
Y Cb Cr
COMPUTER IN AUDIO IN
NOTE: Refer to your DVD player's owner's manual for more information about your DVD player's video output requirements.
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output
Use audio equipment for stereo sound.
The projector's built-in speaker is monaural.
DVD player
Audio Equipment
Optional 15-pin - to
- RCA (female) 3
cable (ADP-CV1E)
Optional 15-pin - to
- RCA (female) 3
cable (ADP-CV1E)
Component video RCA3
cable (not supplied)
Audio cable (not supplied)
Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio cable (not supplied)
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
NP216
15
AUDIO IN
L R AUDIO OUT
L R
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
Connecting Your VCR
Use audio equipment for stereo sound.
The projector's built-in speaker is monaural.
S-Video cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Video cable
(not supplied)
S-Video cable
(not supplied)
VCR
Audio equipment
Audio cable (not supplied)
Audio cable
(not supplied)
NOTE: Refer to your VCR owner's manual for more information about your equipment's video output requirements.
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind via
a scan converter.
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
TIP: The AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) is shared between COMPUTER, VIDEO and S-VIDEO inputs.
Stereo mini plug - to
- RCA audio cable
(not supplied)
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN AUDIO IN
NP216
16
Connecting to a Network (NP216/NP215 only)
The projector comes standard with a LAN port (RJ-45) which provides a LAN connection using a LAN cable.
Using a LAN cable allows you to specify the Network Settings and the Alert Mail Settings for the projector over a LAN.
To use a LAN connection, you are required to assign an IP address to the projector on the [PROJECTOR NETWORK
SETTINGS] screen of the web browser on your computer. For setting, see page 37, 38, 39.
Example of LAN connection
Example of wired LAN connection
LAN
LAN
Server
Hub
LAN cable (not supplied)
NOTE: Use a Category 5
or higher LAN cable.
NP216
17
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable
Connect the supplied power cable to the projector.
First connect the supplied power cable's three-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other plug
of the supplied power cable in the wall outlet.
To wall outlet
The projector will go into standby
mode. When in standby mode, the
POWER indicator will light orange
and the STATUS indicator will light
green when [NORMAL] is selected
for [STANDBY MODE].
CAUTION:
Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if the
AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation.
Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into both the
power plug and the wall outlet.
18
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a picture onto the screen.
@ Turning on the Projector
1. Remove the lens cap
Do not remove the lens cap by pulling on the string. Doing
so can cause mechanical damage to the part around the
lens.
2. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet
or the POWER ON button on the remote control for 1
second.
The POWER indicator will turn to green and the projector
will become ready to use.
NOTE: When the projector is turned on, it may take some time
before the lamp light becomes bright.
TIP:
When the STATUS indicator lights orange, it means that the
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is turned on. ( page 59)
When the message Projector is locked! Enter your password.
is displayed, it means that the [SECURITY] is turned on. (
page 32)
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer
or video source is turned on and that your lens cap is
removed.
NOTE: When no signal is available, the NEC logo (default), blue, or
black screen will be displayed. After a lapse of 45 seconds from when
the projector displays a blue, black or logo screen, [ECO MODE] will
always switch to [ON]. This is done only when [ECO MODE] is set
to [OFF].
Standby
Preparing to power on
Power On
Steady orange light Blinking green light Steady green light
( page 73)
19
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)
When you rst turn on the projector, you will get the Startup menu. This menu gives you the opportunity to select one
of the 21 menu languages.
To select a menu language, follow these steps:
1. Use the , , or button to select one of the 21
languages from the menu.
2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.
After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu
operation.
If you want, you can select the menu language later.
( [LANGUAGE] on page 45 and 56)
NOTE:
If one of the following things happens, the projector will not turn on.
- If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this condition the
projector will not turn on to protect the internal system. If this happens, wait for the projector's internal components to cool
down.
- When the lamp reaches its end of usable life, the projector will not turn on. If this happens, replace the lamp.
- If the STATUS indicator lights orange as long as the POWER button is pressed, it means the CONTROL PANEL LOCK has been
set.
- If the lamp fails to light, and if the STATUS indicator fashes on and off in a cycle of six times, wait a full minute and then turn
on the power.
The projector cannot be turned off with the ON/STAND BY button or the POWER OFF button while the POWER indicator is fashing
green in a cycle of 0.5 second on and 0.5 second off.
Do not disconnect the AC power supply to the projector for 60 seconds immediately after turning it on and displaying an im-
age.
Immediately after turning on the projector, screen ficker may occur. This is normal. Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp lighting is
stabilized.
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off or when the temperature is high, the fans run without display-
ing an image for some time and then the projector will display the image.
20
@ Selecting a Source
Selecting the computer or video source
NOTE: Turn on the computer or video source equipment connected to the projector.
Selecting from Source List
Press and quickly release the SOURCE button on the projector cabinet to display
the Source list. Each time the SOURCE button is pressed, the input source will
change as follows: COMPUTER, VIDEO, S-VIDEO. To display the selected
source, press the ENTER button or allow 2 seconds to elapse.
Detecting the Signal Automatically
Press and hold the SOURCE button for a minimum of 2 seconds, the projector
will search for the next available input source. Each time you press and hold the
SOURCE button for a minimum of 2 seconds, the input source will change as
follows:
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110:
COMPUTER VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPUTER ...
NP216:
COMPUTER 1 COMPUTER 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPUTER 1
...
TIP: If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped.
Using the Remote Control
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: Press any one of the COMPUTER 1, VIDEO, and
S-VIDEO buttons.
NP216: Press any one of the COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2, VIDEO, and S-
VIDEO buttons.
Selecting Default Source
You can set a source as the default source so that it will be displayed each time
the projector is turned on.
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the button twice to select [SETUP] and press the button or
the ENTER button to select [GENERAL].
3. Press the button four times to select [OPTIONS(2)].
4. Press the button six times to select [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] and
press the ENTER button.
The [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] screen will be displayed.
( page 64)
5. Select a source as the default source, and press the ENTER button.
6. Press the EXIT button a few times to close the menu.
7. Restart the projector.
The source you selected in step 5 will be projected.
TIP: When the projector is in Standby mode, applying a computer signal from a computer
connected to the COMPUTER IN input will power on the projector and simultaneously
project the computers image.
([AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)]/[AUTO POWER ON(COMP1)] for NP216 page 64)
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
NP216
NP216
21
@ Adjusting the Picture Size and Position
Use the adjustable tilt foot, the zoom lever or the focus ring to adjust the picture size and position.
In this chapter drawings and cables are omitted for clarity.
Adjusting the throw angle (the height of an image)
[Tilt foot] ( page 22)
Adjusting the left and right tilt of an image
[Rear foot] ( page 22)
Finely adjusting the size of an image
[Zoom lever] ( page 23)
Adjusting the focus
[Focus ring] ( page 23)
Adjusting the keystone correction [KEYSTONE] ( page 24)
22
2
1
4
3
Ventilation
outlet
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
Adjust the Tilt Foot
1. Lift the front edge of the projector.
CAUTION:
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet during Tilt Foot adjustment
as it can become heated while the projector is turned on and after it
is turned off.
2. Push up and hold the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever on the front of
the projector to extend the adjustable tilt foot.
3. Lower the front of the projector to the desired height.
4. Release the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever to lock the Adjustable tilt
foot.
The tilt foot can be extended up to 1.6 inch/40 mm.
There is approximately 10 degrees (up) of adjustment for the front of
the projector.
Rotate the rear foot to the desired height in order to square the image
on the projection surface.
CAUTION:
Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended.
Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or hang (from the wall or
ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
Adjusting the left and right tilt of an image [Rear foot]
1. Remove the spacer (black rubber) from the rear foot.
Keep the spacer for future use.
2. Rotate the rear foot.
The rear foot can be extended up to 0.4 inch/10 mm. Rotating the rear
foot allows the projector to be placed horizontally.
NOTE: After using the projector, attach the spacer to the rear foot.

Spacer (black
rubber)
Rear foot
Up Down
23
Zoom
Use the ZOOM lever to adjust the image size on the screen.
Zoom Lever
Focus
Use the FOCUS ring to obtain the best focus.
Focus Ring
24
@ Correcting Keystone Distortion
Correcting Keystone Distortion
If the screen is tilted vertically, keystone distortion becomes large. Proceed with the following
steps to correct keystone distortion

NOTE:
The Keystone correction can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.
The Keystone correction range can be made narrower, depending on a signal or its aspect ratio selection.
Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet
1. Press the ( ) or ( ) button with no menus displayed.
The keystone bar will be displayed.

2. Use the or to correct the keystone distortion.
Adjust so that the right and left sides are parallel.
3. Press the ENTER button.
The keystone bar will be closed.
NOTE: When the menu is displayed, the above operation is not available. When the menu is displayed, press the MENU button to
close the menu and start the Keystone correction.
From the menu, select [SETUP] [GENERAL] [KEYSTONE]. The changes can be saved with [KEYSTONE SAVE]. ( page 55)
25
Adjusting with the remote control
1. Press the KEYSTONE button.
The Keystone bar will be displayed.

2. Use the or button to correct the keystone distortion.
Adjust so that the right and left sides are parallel.

NOTE:
The Keystone correction can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.
The maximum range of vertical keystone correction is +/40 degrees. This maximum range may be smaller depending on the
signal or aspect ratio setting. The Keystone correction range will also be smaller when 3D mode is enabled.
The range of keystone correction is not the maximum tilt angle of projector.
The left and right (horizontal) keystone correction is not available.
TIP: The changes can be saved with [KEYSTONE SAVE]. ( page 55)
ON OFF
AUTO ADJ.
COMPUTER
VIDEO S-VIDEO VIEWER
ID SET CLEAR
AV-MUTE FREEZE
ENTER
EXIT
ECO MODEKEYSTONEPICTURE
VOL. HELP FOCUS ASPECT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
MENU
ZOOM
L-CLICK R-CLICK
MOUSE
P
A
G
E

M
A
G
N
IF
Y

POWER
ON OFF
AUTO ADJ.
COMPUTER
ID SET CLEAR
AV-MUTE FREEZE
ENTER
EXIT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
MENU
ZOOM
L-CLICK R-CLICK
MOUSE
P
A
G
E

M
A
G
N
IF
Y

POWER
ENTER
ON OFF
AUTO ADJ.
COMPUTER
ID SET CLEAR
AV-MUTE FREEZE
EXIT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
MENU
ZOOM
L-CLICK R-CLICK
MOUSE
P
A
G
E

M
A
G
N
IF
Y

POWER
26
@ Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust
Optimizing a computer image automatically.
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer image automatically.
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the rst time.
[Poor picture]
[Normal picture]
NOTE:
Some signals may take time to display or may not be displayed correctly.
The Auto Adjust function will work for computer (RGB) signal only.
If the Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the computer signal, try to adjust [HORIZONTAL], [VERTICAL], [CLOCK], and [PHASE]
manually. ( page 51, 52)
@ Turning Up or Down Volume
Sound level from the speaker can be adjusted.
TIP: When no menus appear, the and buttons on the projector cabinet work as a volume control.
Increase volume
Decrease volume
NOTE: The [BEEP] sound volume cannot be adjusted. To turn off the [BEEP] sound, from the menu, select [SETUP] [OPTIONS
(1)] [BEEP] [OFF].
27
@ Turning off the Projector
To turn off the projector:
1. First, press the (POWER) button on the projector
cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote con-
trol.
The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE? /CARBON SAV-
INGS- SESSION X.XXX[g-CO2]] message will appear.
2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the
(POWER) or the POWER OFF button again.
The lamp will turn off and the projector will go into standby
mode. When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will
light orange and the STATUS indicator will light green when
[NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE].
Immediately after turning on the projector and displaying an
image, you cannot turn off the projector for 60 seconds.
3. Finally, unplug the power cable.
The POWER indicator will go out.
CAUTION:
Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the AC power supply is disconnected either during normal
projector operation or during cooling fan operation. Use caution when picking up the projector.
Power On Standby
Steady green light Steady orange light
NOTE:
Do not turn off the power for 60 seconds immediately after turning it on and displaying an image.
Do not disconnect the AC power supply to the projector within 10 seconds of making adjustment or setting changes and closing
the menu. Doing so can cause loss of adjustments and settings.
28
@ After Use
Preparation: Make sure that the projector is turned off.
1. Disconnect any other cables.
2. Retract adjustable tilt foot if extended.
3. Cover the lens with the lens cap.
29
@ Turning off the Image and Sound
Press the AV-MUTE button to turn off the image and sound for a short
period of time. Press again to restore the image and sound.
NOTE: Even though the image is turned off, the menu still remains on the
screen.
@ Freezing a Picture
Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture. Press again to resume
motion.
NOTE: The image is frozen but the original video is still playing back.
@ Enlarging a Picture
You can enlarge the picture up to four times.
NOTE: The maximum magnifcation may be less than four times depending on the
signal or when [WIDE ZOOM] is selected for [ASPECT RATIO].
To do so:
1. Press the MAGNIFY (+) button to magnify the picture.
To move the magnied image, use the ,, or button.
2. Press the button.
The area of the magnied image will be moved
3. Press the MAGNIFY () button.
Each time the MAGNIFY () button is pressed, the image is re-
duced.
NOTE:
The image will be enlarged or reduced at the center of the screen.
Displaying the menu will cancel the current magnifcation.
4. Convenient Features
30
@ Changing Eco Mode
This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp:
OFF and ON modes. The lamp life can be extended by turning on the [ECO MODE].
[ECO MODE] Description Status of LAMP indicator
[OFF] This is the default setting (100% Brightness). Off
STATUS
LAMP
[ON] Select this mode to increase the lamp life (approx.
90% Brightness.)
Steady Green light
STATUS
LAMP
ON OFF
AUTO ADJ.
COMPUTER
ID SET CLEAR
AV-MUTE FREEZE
ENTER
EXIT
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
MENU
ZOOM
L-CLICK R-CLICK
MOUSE
P
A
G
E

M
A
G
N
IF
Y

POWER
To turn on the [ECO MODE], do the following:

1. Press the ECO MODE button on the remote control to display
[ECO MODE] screen.
2. Use the or button to select [ON].
To change from [ON] to [OFF], Go back to Step 2 and select [OFF].
Repeat Step 3.
NOTE:
The [ECO MODE] can be changed by using the menu.
Select [SETUP] [GENERAL] [ECO MODE].
The lamp life remaining and lamp hours used can be checked in [USAGE TIME].
Select [INFO.] [USAGE TIME].
The projector will always enter into the [ECO MODE] [OFF] condition for 60
seconds immediately after the projector is turned on. The lamp condition will
not be affected even when [ECO MODE] is changed within this time period.
After a lapse of 45 seconds from when the projector displays a blue, black or
logo screen, [ECO MODE] will automatically switch to [ON]. This is done only
when [ECO MODE] is set to [OFF].
If the projector is overheated in [OFF] mode, there may be a case where the [ECO
MODE] automatically changes to [ON] mode to protect the projector. When the
projector is in [ON] mode, the picture brightness decreases. When the projector
comes back to normal temperature, the [ECO MODE] returns to [OFF] mode.
Thermometer symbol [ ] indicates the [ECO MODE] is automatically set to
[ON] mode because the internal temperature is too high.
31
@ Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]
This feature will show energy-saving effect in terms of CO2 emission reduction (kg) when the projectors [ECO MODE]
is set to [ON]. This feature is called [CARBON METER].
There are two messages: [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS] and [CARBON SAVINGS-SESSION]. The [TOTAL CARBON
SAVINGS] message shows the total amount of CO2 emission reduction from the time of shipment up to now. You can
check the information on [USAGE TIME] from [INFO.] of the menu. ( page 66)
The [CARBON SAVINGS-SESSION] message shows the amount of CO2 emission reduction between the time of
changing to ECO MODE immediately after the time of power-on and the time of power-off. The [CARBON SAVINGS-
SESSION] message will be displayed in the [POWER OFF/ ARE YOU SURE?] message at the time of power-off.
TIP:
The formula as shown below is used to calculate the amount of CO2 emission reduction.
Amount of CO2 emission reduction = Power consumption in OFF for ECO MODE Power consumption in ON for ECO MODE x
CO2 conversion factor.*
* Calculation for amount of CO2 emission reduction is based on an OECD publication CO2 Emissions from Fuel Combustion, 2008
Edition.
This formula will not apply to the power consumption which is not affected by whether [ECO MODE] is turned on or off.
32
@ Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]
A keyword can be set for your projector using the Menu to avoid operation by an unauthorized user. When a keyword
is set, turning on the projector will display the Keyword input screen. Unless the correct keyword is entered, the pro-
jector cannot project an image.
The [SECURITY] setting cannot be cancelled by using the [RESET] of the menu.
To enable the Security function:
2. Press the button twice to select [SETUP] and press the button or the ENTER button to select [GEN-
ERAL].
3. Press the button to select [INSTALLATION].
4. Press the button three times to select [SECURITY] and press the ENTER button.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
5. Press the button to select [ON] and press the ENTER button.
The [SECURITY KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
6. Type in a combination of the four buttons and press the ENTER button.
NOTE: A keyword must be 4 to 10 digits in length.
The [CONFIRM KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
33
7. Type in the same combination of buttons and press the ENTER button.
The conrmation screen will be displayed.
8. Select [YES] and press the ENTER button.
The SECURITY function has been enabled.
To turn on the projector when [SECURITY] is enabled:
1. Press and hold the POWER button for about 1 second.
The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is locked.
3. Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.
NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the power cable is unplugged.
34
To disable the SECURITY function:
2. Select [SETUP] [INSTALLATION] [SECURITY] and press the ENTER button.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
3. Select [OFF] and press the ENTER button.
The KEYWORD CONFIRMATION screen will be displayed.
4. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button.
When the correct keyword is entered, the SECURITY function will be disabled.
NOTE: If you forget your keyword, contact your dealer. Your dealer will provide you with your keyword in exchange for your request
code. Your request code is displayed in the Keyword Confrmation screen. In this example [K992-45L8-JNGJ-4XU9-1YAT-EEA2] is
a request code.
35
30
30
@ Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR)
The optional remote mouse receiver enables you to operate your computers mouse functions from the remote control.
It is a great convenience for clicking through your computer-generated presentations.
Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer
If you wish to use the remote mouse function, connect the mouse receiver and computer.
The mouse receiver can be connected directly to the computers USB port (type A).
NOTE: Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer, you may have to restart your computer or change
your computer settings.
When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver
When connecting using the USB terminal
For PC, the mouse receiver can only be used with a Windows XP*, Windows 2000, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or
Mac OS X 10.0.0 or later operating system.
* NOTE: In SP1 or older version of Windows XP, if the mouse cursor will not move correctly, do the following:
Clear the Enhance pointer precision check box underneath the mouse speed slider in the Mouse Properties dialog box [Pointer
Options tab].
NOTE: The PAGE and buttons do not work with PowerPoint for Macintosh.
NOTE: Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the mouse receiver before reconnecting it and vice versa. The computer may not
identify the mouse receiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals.
Remote mouse receiver
Computer
To USB port of PC or Macintosh
Remote sensor on the
remote mouse receiver
7m/22 feet
36
Operating your computers mouse from the remote control
You can operate your computers mouse from the remote control.
PAGE / Button: scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in Power-
Point on your computer.
Buttons: moves the mouse cursor on your computer.
MOUSE L-CLICK Button: works as the mouse left button.
MOUSE R-CLICK Button: works as the mouse right button.
NOTE:
When you operate the computer using the or button with the menu displayed, both the menu and the mouse pointer
will be affected. Close the menu and perform the mouse operation.
The PAGE and buttons do not work with PowerPoint for Macintosh.
About Drag Mode:
By pressing the MOUSE L-CLICK or R-CLICK button for 2 or 3 seconds then releasing, the drag mode is set and the
drag operation can be performed simply by pressing the button. To drop the item, press the MOUSE L-CLICK
(or R-CLICK) button. To cancel it, press the MOUSE R-CLICK (or L-CLICK) button.
TIP: You can change the Pointer speed on the Mouse Properties dialog box on the Windows. For more information, see the user
documentation or online help supplied with your computer.
37
@ Network Setting by Using an HTTP Browser (NP216/NP215
only)
Overview
Connecting the projector to a network allows the Alert Mail setting ( page 39) and the projector control from a
computer via the network.
To perform the projector control from a web browser, you must have an exclusive application installed on your com-
puter.
The IP address and subnet mask of the projector can be set on the Network Setting screen of the web browser by
using an HTTP server function. Please be sure to use Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or a higher version for the web
browser. (This device uses JavaScript and Cookies and the browser should be set to accept these functions. The
setting method will vary depending on the version of browser. Please refer to the help les and the other information
provided in your software.)
Access is gained to the HTTP server function by starting the Web browser on the computer via the network connected
to the projector and enter the following URL.
Network Setting
http://<the projectors IP address>/index.html
Alert Mail Setting
http://<the projectors IP address>/lancong.html
TIP:
The default IP address is 192.168.0.10.
The exclusive application can be downloaded from our website.
NOTE:
If the PROJECTOR NETWORK SETTINGS screen does not appear in the web browser, press the Ctrl+F5 keys to refresh your web
browser (or clear the cache).
The displays or buttons response can be slowed down or operation may not be accepted depending the settings of your network.
Should this happen, consult your network administrator.
The projector may not respond if its buttons are repeatedly pressed in rapid intervals. Should this happen, wait a moment and
repeat. If you still cant get any response, turn off and back on the projector.
Preparation Before Use
Connect the projector to a commercially available LAN cable before engaging in browser operations. ( page 16)
Operation with a browser that uses a proxy server may not be possible depending on the type of proxy server and the
setting method. Although the type of proxy server will be a factor, it is possible that items that have actually been set
will not be displayed depending on the effectiveness of the cache, and the contents set from the browser may not be
reected in operation. It is recommended that a proxy server not be used unless it is unavoidable.
Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser
Regarding the actual address that is entered for the address or entered to the URL column when operation of the pro-
jector is via a browser, the host name can be used as it is when the host name corresponding to the IP address of the
projector has been registered to the domain name server by a network administrator, or the host name corresponding
to the IP address of the projector has been set in the HOSTS le of the computer being used.
Example 1: When the host name of the projector has been set to pj.nec.co.jp, access is gained to the network
setting by specifying
http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html
for the address or the entry column of the URL.
Example 2: When the IP address of the projector is 192.168.73.1, access is gained to the mail alert settings by
specifying
http://192.168.73.1/index.html
for the address or the entry column of the URL.
38
Network Settings
http://<the projectors IP address> /index.html
DHCP .................................. Enabling this option automatically assigns an IP address to the projector from your DHCP server.
Disabling this option allows you to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from
your network administrator.
TIP: You can check the IP address in the menu when [ENABLE] is selected for [DHCP].
To do so, from the menu, select [INFO.] [WIRED LAN] when [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set to
[LAN].
IP ADDRESS ....................... Set your IP address of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected for
[DHCP].
TIP: You can check your specifed IP address in the menu
To do so, from the menu, select [INFO.] [WIRED LAN] .
SUBNET MASK ................... Set your subnet mask number of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected
for [DHCP].
DEFAULT GATEWAY ................ Set your default gateway of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected for
[DHCP].
DNS (PRIMARY) ................. Set your primary DNS settings of the network connected to the projector.
DNS (SECONDARY) .................Set your secondary DNS settings of the network connected to the projector.
UPDATE .............................. Reect your settings.
NOTE: Close the browser after clicking [UPDATE]. The projector will automatically update your
settings.
TIP: Selecting [NETWORK SETTINGS] for [RESET] from the projectors menu allows you to return the following items to the factory
default.
[DHCP]: DISABLE
[IP ADDRESS]: 192.168.0.10
[SUBNET MASK]: 255.255.255.0
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]: 192.168.0.1
* [DNS(PRIMARY)] and [DNS(SECONDARY)] will remain unchanged.
39
Alert Mail Setting
http://<the projectors IP address>/lancong.html
This option noties your computer of an error message via e-mail when using wired LAN. An error message notication
will be sent when the projector lamp has reached the end of its usable life or an error occurs in the projector.
HOST NAME ............................ Type in the hostname of the network connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric char-
acters can be used. If the host name is unknown, type in a string of characters representing the
projector. Example: Projector 1
DOMAIN NAME ........................ Type in the domain name of the network connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric
characters can be used. If the domain name is unknown, type in the right side of @ in the senders
address. Example: nec. com
ALERT MAIL ............................. Checking [ENABLE] will turn on the Alert Mail feature.
Checking [DISABLE] will turn off the Alert Mail feature.
SENDERS ADDRESS ................ Type in the senders address. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be used.
SMTP SERVER NAME ............... Type in the SMTP server name to be connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters
can be used.
RECIPIENTS ADDRESS 1 to 3 .... Type in your recipients address. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be used.
APPLY ....................................... Click this button to reect the above settings
EXECUTE .................................. Click this button to send a test mail to check if your settings are correct.
STATUS ..................................... A reply to a test mail will be displayed.
NOTE:
If you execute a test, you may not receive an Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the network settings are correct.
If you entered an incorrect address in a test, you may not receive an Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the Recipient s Ad-
dress is correct
TIP: The Alert Mail settings will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
40
@ Viewing 3D Images
The projector provides 3D images to a user wearing commercially available DLP
Link compatible LCD shutter eye-

glasses.
CAUTION
Health precautions
Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the users manual included with your
LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video les and
the like.
- Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close a
distance can strain your eyes.
- Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every hour
of viewing.
- If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing 3D
images.
Features for 3D image viewing
The 3D feature supports the DLP
Link system, one of 3D systems called the LCD shutter glass method. 3D viewing
is achieved by using dedicated LCD shutter eyeglasses to view left and right eye images alternately projected on the
screen. The LCD shutter eyeglasses compatible with the DLP
Link system are used for viewing 3D images by syn-

chronizing to the switched timing of the refective synch signals, which are included in left eye and right eye images,
reected from the screen.
LCD shutter eyeglasses (recommended)
Use DLP
Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses. We recommend you to use X102 Series manufactured by XpanD.
http://www.xpand3dtv.com/
Steps for viewing 3D images on the projector
1. Connect the projector to your video equipment.
2. Turn on the projector, display the on-screen menu, and then select [ON] for the 3D mode.
For the operating procedure to turn on the 3D mode, refer to "On-screen menu for 3D images" on the following
page. Set other 3D-related menu options such as [DLP Link] and [L/R INVERT] as necessary.
3. Play your 3D compatible content and use the projector to display the image.
4. Put on your LCD shutter eyeglasses to view 3D images.
Also refer to the user's manual accompanied with your LCD shutter eyeglasses for more information.
41
On-screen menu for 3D images
Follow the steps to display the 3D menu.
The [SOURCE] menu will be displayed.

[NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216]
2. Press the button twice.
The [SETUP] menu will be displayed.

3. Press the button once, and then press the button four times.
The [3D] menu will be displayed

[NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216]
Selecting input connected to a source of 3D images [COMPUTER / VIDEO / S-VIDEO]/[COMPUTER 1/COM-
PUTER 2/VIDEO/S-VIDEO (NP216 only)
This function switches the 3D mode between ON and OFF for each input.
NOTE:
To confrm that the supported 3D signal is accepted, use either way of the following:
- Make sure that [3D] is displayed in the top right of the screen after the source is selected.
- Display [INFO.] [SOURCE] [3D SIGNAL] and make sure that "SUPPORTED" is displayed.
Enabling DLP
Link to view 3D images [DLP Link]

To use DLP
Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses, select [ON].

To use other LCD shutter eyeglasses such as IR or wired LCD shutter types, select [OFF].
If you use LCD shutter eyeglasses that are not compatible with DLP
Link, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may not

synchronize to the projector properly.
42
Inverting the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye [L/R INVERT]
This function changes the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye.
Change the setting if you have difculty seeing 3D images.
Each time you press the PICTURE button on the remote control, the following menu items will change:
[L/R INVERT] [CONTRAST] [BRIGHTNESS] ...
NOTE: When [OFF] is selected for [DLP
Link], this function is not available.

NOTE:
If 3D content is played back on your computer and the performance is poor it may be caused by the CPU or graphics chip. In this
case you may have diffculty seeing the 3D images as they were intended. Check to see if your computer meets the requirements
provided in your user's manual included with your 3D content.
The DLP
Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses allow you to view 3D images by receiving synch signals, which are included
in left eye and right eye images, refected from the screen. Depending on environments or conditions such as the ambient bright-
ness, screen size or viewing distance, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may fail to receive synch signals, causing poor 3D images.
When the 3D mode is enabled, [3D] will be displayed in the [SOURCE] menu.
When the 3D mode is enabled, the Keystone correction range will be narrower.
When the 3D mode is enabled, the following settings are invalid.
[WALL COLOR], [PRESET], [REFERENCE], [COLOR TEMPERATURE]
Refer to the [SOURCE] screen under the [INFO.] menu for information on whether the input signal is 3D compatible.
Signals other than those listed below will be out of range or will be displayed in 2D.
[COMPUTER]/[COMPUTER 1/COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only)]
640x480@120Hz, 800x600@120Hz, 1024x768@120Hz, 1280x720@120Hz, 640x480@60Hz, 800x600@60Hz, 1024x768@60Hz,
1280x720@60Hz
[VIDEO/S-VIDEO]
Signals with vertical frequency of 60Hz
Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images
If images will not be displayed in 3D or 3D images appear as 2D, check the following table. Also refer to the user's
manual accompanied with your 3D content or LCD shutter eyeglasses.
Possible causes Solutions
The content you are playing back is not compatible with 3D. Play back a content compatible with 3D.
The 3D mode was turned off for the selected source.
Use the projector's menu to turn on 3D mode for the selected
source. ( page 41)
You are not using our recommended LCD shutter eyeglasses. Use our recommended LCD shutter eyeglasses. ( page 40)
If the shutter of your DLP Link compatible LCD shutter eye-
glasses cannot synchronize with the currently projected source,
the following are possible causes:
- Your LCD shutter eyeglasses are not switched on. Switch on your LCD shutter eyeglasses.
- The battery in the LCD shutter eyeglasses ran down. Recharge the battery or replace it.
- [DLP Link] was not turned on.
Use the projector's menu to turn on [DLP Link]. ( page
41)
- The viewing distance between the viewer and the screen is
too far.
Move closer to the screen until the viewer gets 3D images.
Or use the projector's menu to select [NON-INVERT] for [L/R
INVERT].
- There are bright light sources or other projectors near the
viewer.
Keep light sources or other projectors away from the viewer.
Do not look toward a bright light source.
Or use the projector's menu to select [NON-INVERT] for [L/R
INVERT].
If your computer is not set for 3D viewing, the following are
possible causes:
- Your computer does not meet the requirements for 3D view-
ing.
Check to see if your computer meets the requirements provided
in your user's manual included with your 3D content.
- Your computer is not set for 3D output. Set your computer for 3D output.
- The resolution of output signal is out of range. Select the resolution of output signal supporting 3D.
- The refresh rate of output signal is out of range. Change the refresh rate to 60Hz or 120Hz.
43
5. Using On-Screen Menu
@ Using the Menus
NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced motion video image is projected.
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.
NOTE: The commands such as ENTER, EXIT, , in the bottom show available buttons for your operation.
2. Press the buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.
3. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the top item or the rst
tab.
4. Use the buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or
set.
You can use the buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want.
5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window.
6. Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using the buttons on the remote control or
the projector cabinet.
Changes are stored until adjusted again.
7. Repeat steps 2 -6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the projec-
tor cabinet to quit the menu display.
NOTE: When a menu or message is displayed, several lines of information may be lost, depending on the signal or settings.
8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.
To return to the previous menu, press the EXIT button.
44
@ Menu Elements
Slide bar
Solid triangle
Tab
Radio button
High Altitude symbol
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:
Highlight ............................. Indicates the selected menu or item.
Solid triangle ...................... Indicates further choices are available. A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active.
Tab ...................................... Indicates a group of features in a dialog box. Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front.
Radio button ....................... Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box.
Source ................................ Indicates the currently selected source.
Off Timer remaining time .... Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset.
Slide bar ............................. Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment.
Key Lock symbol ................ Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled.
Thermometer symbol ......... Indicates the [ECO MODE] is forcibly set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too
high.
High Altitude symbol .......... Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode.
Source
Available buttons
Thermometer symbol
Key Lock symbol
Off Timer remaining
time
Highlight
45
@ List of Menu Items
Some menu items are not available depending on the input source.
Menu Item Default Options
SOURCE
COMPUTER
COMPUTER1, COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only)
*
VIDEO *
S-VIDEO *
ADJUST
PICTURE
PRESET * 16
DETAIL
SETTINGS
REFERENCE *
HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE,
GRAPHIC, sRGB
GAMMA
CORRECTION
* DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAIL
COLOR
TEMPERATURE
* 5000, 6500, 7800, 8500, 9300, 10500
BrilliantColor OFF, MEDIUM, HIGH
DYNAMIC
CONTRAST
* OFF, ON
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
COLOR
HUE
RESET
IMAGE
OPTIONS
CLOCK *
PHASE *
HORIZONTAL *
VERTICAL *
ASPECT RATIO * AUTO, 4:3, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, WIDE ZOOM, NATIVE
POSITION 0 -16 to +16
NOISE REDUCTION LOW OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH
TELECINE 2-2/2-3 AUTO OFF, 2-2/2-3 AUTO, 2-2 ON, 2-3 ON
SETUP
GENERAL
KEYSTONE 0 -40 to +40
KEYSTONE SAVE OFF OFF, ON
WALL COLOR OFF
OFF, WHITEBOARD, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD
(GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT
BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK
ECO MODE OFF OFF, ON
CLOSED CAPTION (for North
America only)
OFF
OFF, CAPTION1, CAPTION2, CAPTION3, CAPTION4,
TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANAIS, ITALIANO,
ESPAOL, SVENSKA,
DANSK, PORTUGUS, ETINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI,
NEDERLANDS, SUOMI
NORSK, TRKE, , , , ,
MENU
COLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROME
SOURCE DISPLAY ON OFF, ON
ID DISPLAY ON OFF, ON
ECO MESSAGE OFF OFF, ON
DISPLAY TIME AUTO 45 SEC MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC
BACKGROUND LOGO BLUE, BLACK, LOGO
INSTALLATION
ORIENTATION
DESKTOP
FRONT
DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR,
CEILING FRONT
CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ON
SECURITY OFF OFF, ON
COMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
CONTROL ID
CONTROL ID
NUMBER
1 1254
CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON
OPTIONS(1)
FAN MODE AUTO AUTO, HIGH, HIGH ALTITUDE
COLOR
SYSTEM
VIDEO AUTO
AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N,
PAL60, SECAM
S-VIDEO AUTO
AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N,
PAL60, SECAM
WXGA MODE OFF OFF, ON
BEEP ON OFF, ON
46
SETUP
OPTIONS(2)
OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00
STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, POWER-SAVING
AUTO POWER ON(AC) OFF OFF, ON
AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)
AUTO POWER ON(COMP1)
(NP216 only)
OFF OFF, ON
AUTO POWER OFF OFF OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:20, 0:30
DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT LAST
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: LAST, AUTO,
COMPUTER, VIDEO, S-VIDEO
NP216: LAST, AUTO, COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2,
VIDEO, S-VIDEO
CONTROL TERMINAL (NP216/
NP215 only)
PC CONTROL PC CONTROL, LAN
3D
COMPUTER
COMPUTER1(NP216 only)
COMPUTER2(NP216 only)
OFF OFF, ON
VIDEO OFF OFF, ON
S-VIDEO OFF OFF, ON
DLP Link ON OFF, ON
L/R INVERT NON-INVERT NON-INVERT, INVERT
INFO.
USAGE TIME
LAMP LIFE REMAINING
LAMP HOURS USED
TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS
SOURCE
SOURCE NAME
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY
VERTICAL FREQUENCY
SIGNAL TYPE
VIDEO TYPE
SYNC TYPE
SYNC POLARITY
SCAN TYPE
3D SIGNAL
WIRED LAN
(NP216/NP215
only)
PROJECTOR NAME
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
MAC ADDRESS
VERSION
PRODUCT
SERIAL NUMBER
FIRMWARE
DATA
CONTROL ID (when [CONTROL
ID] is set)
RESET
CURRENT SIGNAL
ALL DATA
NETWORK SETTINGS (NP216/NP215 only)
CLEAR LAMP HOURS
* The asterisk (*) indicates that the default setting varies depending on the signal.
47
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]
[NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216]
COMPUTER
Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER IN input connector.
NOTE:
When the component input signal is connected to the COMPUTER IN connector, select [COMPUTER].
The projector will determine if the input signal is RGB or component signal.
COMPUTER1 & COMPUTER2 (NP216 only)
Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER 1 IN or COMPUTER 2 IN input connector.
NOTE:
When the component input signal is connected to the COMPUTER 1 IN connector, select [COMPUTER1].
The projector will determine if the input signal is RGB or component signal.
VIDEO
Selects what is connected to your VIDEO input-VCR, DVD player or document camera.
S-VIDEO
Selects what is connected to your S-VIDEO input-VCR or DVD player.
NOTE: A frame may freeze for a brief period of time when a video is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind with a Video or S-
Video source.
48
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]
[PICTURE]
[PRESET]
This function allows you to select optimized settings for your projected image.
You can adjust neutral tint for yellow, cyan or magenta.
There are six factory presets optimized for various types of images. You can also use [DETAIL SETTINGS] to set user
adjustable settings to customize each gamma or color.
Your settings can be stored in [PRESET 1] to [PRESET 6].
HIGH-BRIGHT ........ Recommended for use in a brightly lit room.
PRESENTATION ..... Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint le.
VIDEO .................... Recommended for typical TV program viewing.
MOVIE ................... Recommended for movies.
GRAPHIC ............... Recommended for graphics.
sRGB ..................... Standard color values
[DETAIL SETTINGS]
Storing Your Customized Settings [REFERENCE]
This function allows you to store your customized settings in [PRESET 1] to [PRESET 6].
First, select a base preset mode from [REFERENCE], then set [GAMMA CORRECTION], [COLOR TEMPERATURE],
[Brilliant Color] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].
HIGH-BRIGHT ........ Recommended for use in a brightly lit room.
PRESENTATION ..... Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint le.
VIDEO .................... Recommended for typical TV program viewing.
MOVIE ................... Recommended for movies.
GRAPHIC ............... Recommended for graphics.
sRGB ..................... Standard color values.
49
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [GAMMA CORRECTION]
Each mode is recommended for:
DYNAMIC .............. Creates a high-contrast picture.
NATURAL ............... Natural reproduction of the picture.
BLACK DETAIL ....... Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture.
Adjusting Color Temperature [COLOR TEMPERATURE]
This option allows you to select the color temperature of your choice.
NOTE:
When [PRESENTATION] or [HIGH-BRIGHT] is selected in [REFERENCE], this function is not available.
When a color option other than [OFF] is selected for [WALL COLOR], this function is not available.
Adjusting Brightness of White Areas [BrilliantColor]
This function allows you to adjust the brightness of the white areas. As the picture becomes dim, it looks more natu-
ral.
OFF ........................ Turns off the BrilliantColor feature.
MEDIUM ................ Increases brightness of the white areas.
HIGH ...................... Increases more brightness of the white areas.
NOTE:
[BrilliantColor] is not available when [HIGH-BRIGHT] is selected for [REFERENCE].
[BrillianColor] can be set to [MEDIUM] or [HIGH] when [PRESENTATION] is selected for [REFERENCE]
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
Turning on [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] allows the contrast ratio to be adjusted to the proper level.
[CONTRAST]
Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the incoming signal.
[BRIGHTNESS]
Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster intensity.
[SHARPNESS]
Controls the detail of the image.
[COLOR]
Increases or decreases the color saturation level.
[HUE]
Varies the color level from +/ green to +/ blue. The red level is used as reference.
Input signal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE
Computer/Computer 1 & 2 (NP216) Yes Yes No No No
Component Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Video, S-Video Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes = Adjustable, No = Not adjustable
50
[RESET]
The settings and adjustments for [PICTURE] will be returned to the factory settings with the exception of the following;
Preset numbers and [REFERENCE] within the [PRESET] screen.
The settings and adjustments under [DETAIL SETTINGS] within the [PRESET] screen that are not currently selected
will not be reset.
51
[IMAGE OPTIONS]
Adjusting Clock and Phase [CLOCK/PHASE]
This allows you to manually adjust CLOCK and PHASE.
CLOCK ................... Use this item to ne tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear. This
function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image.
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the rst time.
PHASE ................... Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is
evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering.)
Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete.
52
Adjusting Horizontal/Vertical Position [HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]
Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically.
- An image can be distorted during the adjustment of [CLOCK] and [PHASE]. This is not a malfunction.
- Your manual adjustments for [CLOCK], [PHASE], [HORIZONTAL], and [VERTICAL] will be stored in memory for
the current signal. The next time you project the signal with the same resolution, horizontal and vertical frequency,
its adjustments will be called up and applied.
To delete adjustments stored in memory, from the menu, you select [RESET] [CURRENT SIGNAL] or [ALL
DATA] and reset the adjustments.
Selecting Aspect Ratio [ASPECT RATIO]
The term aspect ratio refers to the ratio of width to height of a projected image.
The projector automatically determines the incoming signal and displays it in its appropriate aspect ratio.
This table shows typical resolutions and aspect ratios that most computers support.
Resolution Aspect Ratio
VGA 640 x 480 4:3
SVGA 800 x 600 4:3
XGA 1024 x 768 4:3
WXGA 1280 x 768 15:9
WXGA 1280 x 800 16:10
WXGA+ 1440 x 900 16:10
SXGA 1280 x 1024 5:4
SXGA+ 1400 x 1050 4:3
UXGA 1600 x 1200 4:3
Options Function
AUTO The projector will automatically determine the incoming signal and display it in its aspect
ratio. ( next page)
The projector may erroneously determine the aspect ratio depending on its signal. If this
occurs, select the appropriate aspect ratio from the following.
4:3 The image is displayed in 4:3 aspect ratio.
WIDE ZOOM The image is stretched left and right.
Parts of the displayed image are cropped at the left and right edges and therefore not
visible.
53
NATIVE The projector displays the current image in its true resolution when the incoming computer
signal has a lower resolution than the projectors native resolution.
[Example 1] When the incoming sig-
nal with the resolution of 800 x 600 is
displayed on the NP115/NP110:
[Example 2] When the incoming
signal with the resolution of 800 x 600
is displayed on the NP216/NP215/
NP210:
NOTE:
When a non-computer signal is displayed, the [NATIVE] is not available.
When you are displaying an RGB image with a higher resolution than the projector's native
resolution such as SXGA, the image will be displayed in the projectors native resolution (XGA)
even if [NATIVE] is selected.
Sample image when the appropriate aspect ratio is automatically determined
[Computer signal]
Aspect ratio of incoming signal 4:3 5:4 16:9 15:9 16:10
Sample image when the appro-
priate aspect ratio is automati-
cally determined
[Video signal]
Aspect ratio of incoming signal 4:3 Letterbox Squeeze
Sample image when the as-
pect ratio is automatically de-
termined
NOTE: To display a squeezed signal prop-
erly, select [16:9] or [WIDE ZOOM].
TIP:
Image position can be adjusted vertically using [POSITION] when the [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] aspect ratios are selected.
The term letterbox refers to a more landscape-oriented image when compared to a 4:3 image, which is the standard aspect
ratio for a video source.
The letterbox signal has aspect ratios with the vista size 1.85:1 or cinema scope size 2.35:1 for movie flm.
The term squeeze refers to the compressed image of which aspect ratio is converted from 16:9 to 4:3.
Adjusting the Vertical Position of Image [POSITION]
(only when [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] is selected for [ASPECT RATIO])
When [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] is selected in [ASPECT RATIO], the image is displayed with black borders on the top
and bottom.
You can adjust the vertical position from the top to the bottom of the black area.

54
Turning on Noise Reduction [NOISE REDUCTION]
This function allows you to select the level of noise reduction.
The projector is set to the optimized level for each signal at the factory.
Select your preference item for your signal when video noise is noticeable.
The options are [OFF], [LOW], [MEDIUM], and [HIGH].
NOTE: This feature is not available for the RGB signal. Noise reduction set to off gives best image quality by way of higher bandwidth.
Noise reduction set to on softens the image.
Setting Telecine Mode [TELECINE]
This function allows you to convert motion picture lm images into video. The process adds additional frames to the
picture in order to increase the frame rate.
NOTE: This feature is available only when an SDTV signal is selected.
OFF ........................ Turns off the TELECINE mode.
2-2/2-3 AUTO ........ Detects pull-down correction method.
2-2 ON ................... Uses 2-2 pull-down correction method
2-3 ON ................... Uses 2-3 pull-down correction method
NOTE: This feature is not available for 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i and RGB signals.
55
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]
[GENERAL]
Correcting Vertical Keystone Distortion Manually [KEYSTONE]
You can correct vertical distortion manually. ( page 24)
TIP: When this option is highlighted, pressing the ENTER button will display its slide bar for adjustment.
Saving Vertical Keystone Correction [KEYSTONE SAVE]
This option enables you to save your current keystone settings.
OFF ........................ Does not save current keystone correction settings. It will return your keystone correction settings to
zero.
ON ......................... Saves current keystone correction settings
Saving your change once affects all sources. The changes are saved when the projector is turned off.
Using the Wall Color Correction [WALL COLOR]

This function allows for quick adaptive color correction in applications where the screen material is not white.
NOTE:
Selecting color options other than [OFF] will reduce brightness.
When the 3D mode is enabled, the [WALL COLOR] item is not available.
56
Setting Eco Mode [ECO MODE]
This feature turns on or off the ECO mode. The lamp life can be extended by selecting [ON]. Selecting [ON] also
decreases fan noise when compared to [OFF] mode.
ECO MODE Description Status of LAMP indicator
OFF
This is the Default setting
(100% Brightness).
Off
ON
Select this mode to increase the lamp life
(approx. 90% Brightness.)
Steady Green light
NOTE:
The [LAMP LIFE REMAINING] and [LAMP HOURS USED] can be checked in [USAGE TIME]. Select [INFO.] [USAGE TIME].
( page 66)
The projector will always enter into the [ECO MODE] [OFF] condition for 60 seconds immediately after the projector is turned on.
The lamp condition will not be affected even when [ECO MODE] is changed within this time period.
After a lapse of 45 seconds from when the projector displays a blue, black or logo screen, [ECO MODE] will automatically switch
to [ON].
The projector will return to the [OFF] mode once a signal is accepted.
If the projector becomes overheated in [OFF] mode because of use in a high-temperature room, there may be a case where the
[ECO MODE] automatically changes to [ON] mode to protect the projector. This mode is called forced ECO mode. When the
projector is in [ON] mode, the picture brightness decreases. The LAMP indicators steady light indicates the projector is in [ON]
mode. When the projector comes back to normal temperature, the [ECO MODE] returns to [OFF] mode.
Thermometer symbol [ ] indicates the [ECO MODE] is automatically set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too
high.
Setting Closed Caption [CLOSED CAPTION] (for North America only)
This option sets several closed caption modes that allow text to be superimposed on the projected image of Video
or S-Video.
OFF ........................ This exits the closed caption mode.
CAPTION 1-4 ......... Text is superimposed.
TEXT 1-4 ................ Text is displayed.
Selecting Menu Language [LANGUAGE]
You can choose one of 21 languages for on-screen instructions.
NOTE: Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
57
[MENU]
Selecting Menu Color [COLOR SELECT]
You can choose between two options for menu color: COLOR and MONOCHROME.
Turning On / Off Source Display [SOURCE DISPLAY]
This option turns on or off input name display such as COMPUTER, VIDEO, S-VIDEO and No Input to be displayed
on the top right of the screen.
When [ON] is selected, the following will be displayed:
- An input name display such as [COMPUTER] will be shown immediately after source selection.
- [NO INPUT] will be shown when there is no signal present.
Turning ON/OFF Control ID [ID DISPLAY]
ID DISPLAY ........... This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control
is pressed.
Turning On / Off Eco Message [ECO MESSAGE]
This option turns on or off the following messages when the projector is turned on.
The Eco Message prompts the user to save energy. When [OFF] is selected for [ECO MODE], you will get a message
to prompt you to select [ON] for [ECO MODE].
When [ON] is selected for [ECO MODE]
To close the message, press the ENTER or the EXIT button. The message will disappear if no button operation is
done for 30 seconds.
When [OFF] is selected for [ECO MODE]
Pressing the ENTER button will display the [ECO MODE] screen. ( page 56)
To close the message, press the EXIT button.
58
Selecting Menu Display Time [DISPLAY TIME]
This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the last touch of a button to turn off the menu. The
preset choices are [MANUAL], [AUTO 5 SEC], [AUTO 15 SEC], and [AUTO 45 SEC]. The [AUTO 45 SEC] is the fac-
tory preset.
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [BACKGROUND]
Use this feature to display a blue/black screen or logo when no signal is available. The default background is
[LOGO].
TIP: The logo can be changed.
For more information about how to change the logo, please consult your NEC or NEC-designated service station.
If you cannot nd one in your area, ask your dealer.
59
[INSTALLATION]
Selecting Projector Orientation [ORIENTATION]
This reorients your image for your type of projection. The options are: desktop front projection, ceiling rear projection,
desktop rear projection, and ceiling front projection.
DESKTOP FRONT CEILING REAR
DESKTOP REAR CEILING FRONT
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [CONTROL PANEL LOCK]
This option turns on or off the CONTROL PANEL LOCK function.
NOTE:
This CONTROL PANEL LOCK does not affect the remote control functions.
When the control panel is locked, pressing and holding the EXIT button on the projector cabinet for about 10 seconds will change
the setting to [OFF].
TIP: When the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is turned on, a key lock icon [ ] will be displayed at the bottom right of the menu.
Enabling Security [SECURITY]
This feature turns on or off the SECURITY function.
Unless the correct keyword is entered, the projector cannot project an image. ( page 32)
60
Selecting Communication Speed [COMMUNICATION SPEED]
This feature sets the baud rate of the PC Control port (D-Sub 9P). It supports data rates from 4800 to 38400 bps. The
default is 38400 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate for your equipment to be connected (depending on the equip-
ment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs).
NOTE: Your selected communication speed will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
Setting ID to the Projector [CONTROL ID]
You can operate multiple projectors separately and independently with the single remote control that has the CONTROL
ID function. If you assign the same ID to all the projectors, you can conveniently operate all the projectors together
using the single remote control. To do so, you have to assign an ID number to each projector.
CONTROL ID NUMBER ....... Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector.
CONTROL ID ....................... Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID set-
ting.
NOTE:
When [ON] is selected for [CONTROL ID], the projector cannot be operated by using the remote control that does not support
the CONTROL ID function. (In this case the buttons on the projector cabinet can be used.)
Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
Pressing and holding the ENTER button on the projector cabinet for 10 seconds will display the menu for canceling the Control
ID.
Assigning or Changing the Control ID
1. Turn on the projector.
2. Press the ID SET button on the remote control.
The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID, the [ACTIVE] will be displayed. If the projector
cannot be operated with the current remote control ID, the [INACTIVE] will be displayed. To operate the inactive
projector, assign the control ID used for the projector by using the following procedure (Step 3).
3. Press one of numeric keypad buttons while pressing and holding the ID SET button on the remote con-
trol.
Example:
To assign 3, press the 3 button on the remote control.
No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single remote
control. To set No ID, enter 000 or press the CLEAR button.
TIP: The range of IDs is from 1 to 254.
4. Release the ID SET button.
The updated CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
NOTE:
The IDs can be cleared in a few days after the batteries are run down or removed.
Accidentally pressing any one of the buttons of the remote control will clear currently specifed
ID with batteries removed.
61
[OPTIONS(1)]
Selecting Fan Mode [FAN MODE]
This option allows you to select three modes for fan speed: Auto mode, High speed mode, and High Altitude mode.
AUTO ..................... The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature.
HIGH ...................... The built-in fans run at high speed.
HIGH ALTITUDE ..... The built-in fans run at a high speed. Select this option when using the projector at altitudes approximately
5500 feet/1700 meters or higher.
When you wish to cool down the temperature inside the projector quickly, select [HIGH].
NOTE:
It is recommended that you select High speed mode if you use the projector non-stop for consecutive days.
Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher.
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause
the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector.
Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the
lamp to overcool, causing the image to ficker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical components such
as the lamp.
Selecting [COLOR SYSTEM]
This feature enables you to select video standards manually.
Normally select [AUTO]. Select the video standard from the pulldown menu. This must be done for VIDEO and S-
VIDEO Connectors separately.
Enabling or Disabling WXGA Mode [WXGA MODE]
Selecting [ON] will give priority to a WXGA (1280 x 768) signal in recognizing an input signal.
When [WXGA MODE] is set to [ON], an XGA (1024 x 768) signal may not be recognized. In this case, select [OFF].
62
Enabling Key Sound and Error Sound [BEEP]
This feature turns on or off the button sound or alarm when the following operations are performed.
- Displaying the main menu
- Switching sources
- Pressing POWER ON or POWER OFF button
63
[OPTIONS(2)]
Using Off Timer [OFF TIMER]
The remaining countdown time will be displayed at the bottom of the menu when the [OFF TIMER] is preset.
1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00.
2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control.
3. The remaining time starts counting down.
4. The projector will turn off after the countdown is complete.
NOTE:
To cancel the preset time, set [OFF] for the preset time or turn off the power.
When the remaining time reaches 3 minutes before the projector is turned off, the [THE PROJECTOR WILL TURN OFF WITHIN 3
MINUTES] message will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
Selecting Power-saving in [STANDBY MODE]
The projector has two standby modes: [NORMAL] and [POWER-SAVING].
The POWER-SAVING mode is the mode that allows you to put the projector in the power-saving condition which
consumes less power than the NORMAL mode. The projector is preset for NORMAL mode at the factory.
NORMAL ................ Power indicator: Orange light/STATUS indicator: Green light
POWER-SAVING .... Power indicator: Red light/STATUS indicator: Off
The following connectors, buttons or functions will not work during this mode.
- PC CONTROL port, and COMPUTER OUT connector (MONITOR OUT on NP216)
- LAN and Mail Alert functions (NP216/NP215 only)
- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet
- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control
NOTE:
When [CONTROL PANEL LOCK], [CONTROL ID], or [AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)] is turned on, the [STANDBY MODE] setting is
not available.
The power consumption in the standby mode will not be included in calculating CO2 emission reduction.
Enabling Auto Power On [AUTO POWER ON(AC)]
Turns the projector on automatically when the power cable is inserted into an active power outlet. This eliminates the
need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or projector cabinet.
64
Turning On the Projector By Applying Computer Signal [AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)/[AUTO POWER
ON(COMP1) ] for NP216]
When the projector is in Standby mode, applying a computer signal from a computer connected to the COMPUTER
IN input (COMPUTER 1 IN on NP216) will power on the projector and simultaneously project the computers image.
This functionality eliminates the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet
to power on the projector.
NOTE:
Disconnecting a computer signal from the computer will not power off the projector. We recommend using this function in com-
bination of the AUTO POWER OFF function.
This function will not be available under the following conditions:
- when a component signal is applied to the COMPUTER IN (COMPUTER 1 IN on NP216) connector
- when a Sync on Green RGB signal or composite sync signal is applied
To enable the AUTO POWER ON (COMP.)/AUTO POWER ON (COMP1) after turning off the projector, wait 3 seconds and input a
computer signal.
If a computer signal is still present when the projector is turned off, the AUTO POWER ON (COMP.)/AUTO POWER ON (COMP1)
will not work and the projector remains in standby mode.
Enabling Power Management [AUTO POWER OFF]
When this option is selected you can enable the projector to automatically turn off (at the selected time: 5min., 10min.,
20min., 30min.) if there is no signal received by any input or if no operation is performed.
Selecting Default Source [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT]
You can set the projector to default to any one of its inputs each time the projector is turned on.
LAST ................................... Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned
on.
AUTO .................................. Searches for an active source in order of COMPUTER VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPUTER (COM-
PUTER 1 COMPUTER 2 on NP216) and displays the rst found source.
COMPUTER ........................ Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN connector every time the projector is turned
on.
COMPUTER 1
(NP216 only) ...................... Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned
on.
COMPUTER 2
(NP216 only) ...................... Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned
on.
VIDEO ................................. Displays the Video source from the VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on.
S-VIDEO ............................. Displays the Video source from the S-VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on.
Selecting Port for External Equipment [CONTROL TERMINAL] (NP216/NP215 only)
This option allows you to select a port for controlling the projector either from PC Control or over a LAN.
PC CONTROL ......... Select for controlling the projector from external equipment connected to the PC CONTROL port (D-Sub 9
Pin).
LAN ........................ Select for controlling the projector from external equipment connected to the LAN port (RJ-45).
NOTE:
- When [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY MODE], controlling the projector from external equipment is not possible.
- The PC Control port and LAN port are not active at the same time.
65
[3D]
[NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216]
Selecting input connected to a source of 3D images [COMPUTER / VIDEO / S-VIDEO]/[COMPUTER 1/COM-
PUTER 2/VIDEO/S-VIDEO] (NP216 only)
This function switches the 3D mode between ON and OFF for each input.
ON ......................... Turns on the 3D mode for the selected input.
NOTE:
To confrm that the supported 3D signal is accepted, use either way of the following:
- Make sure that [3D] is displayed in the top right of the screen after the source is selected.
- Display [INFO.] [SOURCE] [3D SIGNAL] and make sure that "SUPPORTED" is displayed.
OFF ........................ Turns off the 3D mode for the selected input.
Enabling DLP
Link to view 3D images [DLP Link]

This function switches the DLP
Link system between ON and OFF.

ON ......................... Turns on the DLP
Link system.
OFF ........................ Turns off the DLP
Link system.
NOTE:
To use DLP
Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses, select [ON].

To use other LCD shutter eyeglasses such as IR or wired LCD shutter types, select [OFF].
If you use LCD shutter eyeglasses that are not compatible with DLP
Link, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may not synchronize to the

projector properly.
Inverting the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye [L/R INVERT]
This function changes the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye.
Change the setting if you have difculty seeing 3D images.
Each time you press the PICTURE button on the remote control, the following menu items will change:
[L/R INVERT] [CONTRAST] [BRIGHTNESS] ...
66
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]
Displays the status of the current signal and lamp usage. This item has three pages (four pages on NP216/NP215).
The information included is as follows:
TIP: Pressing the HELP button on the remote control will show the [INFO.] menu items.
[USAGE TIME]
[LAMP LIFE REMAINING] (%)*
[LAMP HOURS USED] (H)
[TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS] (kg-CO2)
* The progress indicator shows the percentage of remaining bulb life.
The value informs you of the amount of lamp usage. When the remaining lamp time reaches 0, the LAMP LIFE
REMAINING bar indicator changes from 0% to 100 Hours and starts counting down.
If the remaining lamp time reaches 0 hours, the projector will not turn on regardless of whether the ECO MODE
is set to OFF or ON.
The message to the effect that the lamp should be replaced will be displayed for one minute when the projector
is turned on and when the POWER button on the projector or the remote control is pressed.
To dismiss this message, press any button on the projector or the remote control.
Lamp life(H)
Replacement lamp ECO MODE
OFF ON
3500 5000 NP13LP
[TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS]
This displays the estimated carbon saving information in kg. The carbon footprint factor in the carbon saving cal-
culation is based on the OECD (2008 Edition).
67
[SOURCE]
[SOURCE NAME] [HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY]
[VERTICAL FREQUENCY] [SIGNAL TYPE]
[VIDEO TYPE] [SYNC TYPE]
[SYNC POLARITY] [SCAN TYPE]
[3D SIGNAL]
[WIRED LAN] (NP216/NP215 only)
[PROJECTOR NAME] [IP ADDRESS]
[SUBNET MASK] [GATEWAY]
[MAC ADDRESS]
[VERSION]
[PRODUCT]
[SERIAL NUMBER]
[FIRMWARE] Version
[DATA] Version
[CONTROL ID] (when [CONTROL ID] is set)
68
@ Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]
[NP210/NP115/NP110] [NP216/NP215]
Returning to Factory Default [RESET]
The RESET feature allows you to change adjustments and settings to the factory preset for a (all) source (s) except
the following:
[CURRENT SIGNAL]
Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset levels.
The items that can be reset are: [PRESET], [CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], [COLOR], [HUE], [SHARPNESS],
[ASPECT RATIO], [HORIZONTAL], [VERTICAL], [CLOCK], [PHASE], [NOISE REDUCTION], and [TELECINE].
[ALL DATA]
Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset.
All items can be reset EXCEPT [LANGUAGE], [BACKGROUND], [SECURITY], [COMMUNICATION SPEED],
[CONTROL ID], [STANDBY MODE], [FAN MODE], [CONTROL TERMINAL] (NP216/NP215 only), [LAMP LIFE
REMAINING], [LAMP HOURS USED], [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS], and [NETWORK SETTINGS] (NP216/NP215
only).
To reset the lamp usage time, see Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] below.
Clearing Networking Settings [NETWORK SETTINGS] (NP216/NP215 only)
Returns [DHCP], [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and [GATEWAY] to the default settings.
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS]
Resets the lamp clock back to zero. Selecting this option displays submenu for a confrmation. Select [YES] and press
the ENTER button.
NOTE: Elapsed time of the lamp use will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the
lamp has reached the end of its life. In this condition you cannot clear the lamp hour meter on the menu. If this happens, press the
HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero. Do this only after replacing the lamp.
69
6. Maintenance
This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should follow to clean the cabinet and the lens, and
replace the lamp.
@ Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
Note on Cleaning the Lens
Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
Vacuum the ventilation
inlet of the cabinet.
70
6. Maintenance
@ Replacing the Lamp
When the lamp reaches the end of its life, the LAMP indicator in the cabinet will blink red. Even though the lamp may
still be working, replace the lamp to maintain the optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to
clear the lamp hour meter. ( page 68)
CAUTION
Use the specifed lamp for safety and performance.
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except one lamp cover screw and three lamp housing screws. You could receive
an electric shock.
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep nger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving nger prints on the glass surface might cause
an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours
after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use
the lamp after the lamp reaches the end of its life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered
in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC
dealer for lamp replacement.
*NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions:
for one minute after the projector has been powered on
when the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control is pressed
To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
To replace the lamp:
Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
Replacement lamp: NP13LP
Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
71
6. Maintenance
2. Remove the lamp housing.
(1) Loosen the three screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling condi-
tion.
The three screws are not removable.
There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this
interlock.
(2) Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
1. Remove the lamp cover.
(1) Loosen the lamp cover screw
The lamp cover screw is not removable.
(2) Push and slide the lamp cover off.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the lamp housing is cool
enough to before removing it.
Interlock
72
6. Maintenance
5. Connect the supplied power cable, and turn on the projector.
6. Finally, select the menu [RESET] [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life, the projector
cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.

4. Reattach the lamp cover.
(1) Slide the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
(2) Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover.
Be sure to tighten the screw.
3. Install a new lamp housing.
(1) Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp NP13LP.
Order this from your NEC dealer.
(2) Push the top center of the lamp housing to secure it.
(3) Secure it in place with the three screws.
Be sure to tighten the screws.
Hold the cabinet with your hand to keep it from tilting while you tighten the screw.
73
7. Appendix
@ Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note
Off The power cable is unplugged.
Blinking light Green 0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
2.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
Off Timer is enabled.
Steady light Green The projector is turned on.
Orange [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE]
Red [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY
MODE]
Status Indicator
Off
Normal or Standby ([POWER-SAVING] for
[STANDBY MODE])

Blinking light Red 1 cycle (0.5 sec
On, 2.5 sec Off)
Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp housing cor-
rectly.
2 cycle (0.5 sec
On, 0.5 sec Off)
Temperature error The projector is overheated. Move the projector to
a cooler location.
4 cycle (0.5 sec
On, 0.5 sec Off)
Fan error Fans will not work correctly.
6 cycle (0.5 sec
On, 0.5 sec Off)
Lamp error Lamp fails to light. Wait a full minute and then
turn on again.
Green Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cooling
down.)
The projector is re-ring.
Wait for a moment.
Steady light Green Standby ([NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE])
Orange Cabinet button is locked You have pressed cabinet button when Cabinet
Button is locked.
CONTROL ID error Remote control ID and projector ID are not
matched.
Lamp Indicator
Off Normal
Blinking light Red Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp replace-
ment message will be displayed.
Replace the lamp.
Steady light Red Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The projec-
tor will not turn on until the lamp is replaced.
Replace the lamp.
Green [ECO MODE] is set to [ON]
Over-Temperature Protection
If the temperature inside the projector rises too high, the over-temperature protector will automatically turn off the lamp
with the STATUS indicator blinking (2-cycle On and Off.)
Should this happen, do the following:
Unplug the power cable after the cooling fans stop.
Move the projector to a cooler location if the room where you are presenting is particularly too warm.
Clean the ventilation holes if they are clogged with dust.
Wait about 60 minutes until the inside of the projector becomes cool enough.
74
7. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions ( Power/Status/Lamp Indicator on page 73.)
Problem Check These Items
Does not turn on
or shut down
Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. ( pages 17 and 18)
Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. ( page 72)
Check to see if the projector has overheated. If there is insuffcient ventilation around the projector or if the
room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
Check to see if you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life.
If so, replace the lamp. After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used. ( page 68)
The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700
meters or higher. Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting
to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down. If this happens,
wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. ( page 61)
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image
for some time and then the projector will display the image. Wait for a moment.
Will turn off Ensure that the [OFF TIMER] or [AUTO POWER OFF] is off. ( page 63, 64)
No picture Use the COMPUTER1, the VIDEO or the S-VIDEO button on the remote control to select your source (Com-
puter, Video or S-Video). ( page 20) If there is still no picture, press the button again.
Ensure your cables are connected properly.
Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. ( page 49)
Remove the lens cap.
Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the [RESET] in the Menu. ( page 68)
Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. ( page 32)
Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning
on the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before
being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computers screen-saver
or power management software.
See also the next page.
Picture suddenly be-
comes dark
Check if the projector is in the Forced ECO mode because of too high ambient temperature. If this is the case, lower
the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]. ( page 61)
Color tone or hue is
unusual
Check if an appropriate color is selected in [WALL COLOR]. If so, select an appropriate option. ( page 55)
Adjust [HUE] in [PICTURE]. ( page 49)
Image isnt square to the
screen
Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. ( page 21)
Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. ( page 24)
Picture is blurred Adjust the focus. ( page 23)
Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens.
( page 10)
Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Fl i cker appear s on
screen
Set [FAN MODE] to other than [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode when using the projector at altitudes approximately
5500 feet/1700 meters or lower. Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters
and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to ficker. Switch [FAN
MODE] to [AUTO]. ( page 61)
Image is scrolling ver-
tically, horizontally or
both
Check the computer's resolution and frequency. Make sure that the resolution you are trying to display is sup-
ported by the projector. ( page 80)
Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the [IMAGE OPTIONS]. ( page 52)
Remote control does
not work
Install new batteries.( page 8)
Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. ( page 8)
Make sure that the remote control's ID corresponds with the projector's ID. ( page 60)
Indicator is lit or blink-
ing
See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator. ( page 73)
Cross col or i n RGB
mode
Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. ( page 26)
Adjust the computer image manually with [CLOCK]/[PHASE] in [IMAGE OPTIONS] in the menu. ( page
51)
LAN control is not ac-
tive or PC Control is not
active
Make sure that [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set correctly. ( page 64)
Cannot control the pro-
j ect or f rom ext er nal
equipment
Check to see if [STANDBY MODE] is set to [POWER-SAVING] and if it is, try to set it to [NORMAL]. ( page
63)
3D picture is not dis-
play
See "Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images" on page 42.
For more information contact your dealer.
75
7. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
Power on process for the projector and the PC.
Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on
the power to the notebook PC.
being powered up.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projectors menu under Information. If it reads 0kHz,
this means there is no signal being output from the computer. ( page 67 or go to next step)
Enabling the computers external display.
Displaying an image on the notebook PCs screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector.
When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usu-
ally, the combination of the Fn key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on
or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through
external display selections.
Non-standard signal output from the computer
If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PCs LCD screen when the projector display is in use. Each
notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previous step.
Refer to your computers documentation for detailed information.
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh
When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector)
according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP switch
on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP switch
to the 13" fxed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a displayable mode
and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless mirroring
is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owners manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen
Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] [Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
76
7. Appendix
@ Specications
This section provides technical information about the NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector's performance.
Model Number NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Optical
Projection System Single DLP
chip (0.55", aspect 4:3)

Resolution*
1
NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 pixels
NP115/NP110: 800 x 600 pixels
Lens
Manual zoom and focus
F=2.41-2.55, f=21.8-24.0mm
Lamp 180W AC (160W in ECO Mode)
Light Output*
2
,*
3
NP216/NP215/NP115: 2500 lumens (approx. 90% in ECO Mode)
NP210/NP110: 2200 lumens (approx. 90% in ECO Mode)
Contrast Ratio*
3
(full white: full black)
2000:1
Image Size (Diagonal) 30" - 300" diagonal (4:3)
Projection Distance
46" - 465" (wide) / 52" - 520" (tele)
1.18 - 11.8 m (wide) / 1.32 - 13.2 m (tele)
Projection Angle 14.0 (wide) / 12.7 (tele)
*
1
Effective pixels are more than 99.99%.
*
2
This is the light output value (lumens) when the [PRESET] mode is set to [HIGH-BRIGHT]. If any other mode is
selected as the [PRESET] mode, the light output value may drop.
*
3
Compliance with ISO21118-2005
Electrical
Inputs
NP216: 2 Analog RGB shared with component video (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 S-Video (Mini
DIN 4 Pin), 1 Video (RCA), 2 Stereo Mini Audio, 1 (L/R) RCA Audio
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110:1 Analog RGB shared with component video (Mini D-Sub
15 Pin), 1 S-Video (Mini DIN 4 Pin), 1 Video (RCA), 1 Stereo Mini Audio shared for ana-
log RGB, Video, and S-Video inputs
Output 1 Analog RGB (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin), AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (NP216 only)
PC Control 1 PC Control (D-Sub 9 Pin)
Wired LAN 1 Port RJ-45 (NP216/NP215 only)
Built-in Speaker 7W (monaural)
External Control RS232, IR, Wired LAN (NP216/NP215 only)
Color Reproduction 16.7 million colors simultaneously, Full color
Compatible Signals*
4
VGA/SVGA/XGA/WXGA/SXGA/SXGA+/UXGA
480i/480p/720p/1080i (60Hz)
576i/576p/720p/1080i (50Hz)
DVD: Progressive (50/60Hz)
Video Bandwidth RGB: 100MHz (max.)
Scan Rate
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz(RGB: 24 kHz or over)
Vertical: 50 Hz to 120 Hz (Signals with higher than refresh rate 85 Hz support resolutions
of 1024 x 768 or lower.)
Sync Compatibility Separate Sync
Horizontal Resolution
540 TV lines: NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60
300 TV lines: SECAM
Power Requirement/Input Current
Power Requirement: 100-240V AC, 50/60 Hz
Input Current: 2.6-1.2A
Power Consumption
in OFF for ECO MODE: 242W(100-130V AC)/233W(200-240V AC)
in ON for ECO MODE: 217W(100-130V AC)/210W(200-240V AC)
in NORMAL Mode for STANDBY MODE: 4W(100-130V AC)/5W(200-240V AC)
in POWER-SAVING Mode for STANDBY MODE: 0.49W(100-130V AC)/0.71W(200-240V
AC)
*
4
An image with higher resolution than the projectors native resolution (NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 /
NP115/NP110: 800 x 600) will be displayed with scaling technology.
77
7. Appendix
Mechanical
Installation Orientation: Desktop/Front, Desktop/Rear, Ceiling/Front, Ceiling/Rear
Dimensions
12.2"(W) x 3.7 (H) x 9.7"(D)
310 mm (W) x 95 mm (H) x 247 mm (D)
(not including protrusions)
Net Weight 5.5 lbs / 2.5 kg
Environmental Considerations
Operational Temperatures: 41F to 104F / 5C to 40C
([ECO MODE] is set automatically to [ON] at 95F to 104F/35C to 40C / [ECO MODE]
is set automatically to [ON] at 86F to 104F/30C to 40C when used in HIGH ALTI-
TUDE), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Storage Temperatures: 14F to 122F (-10C to 50C), 20% to 80% humidity (non-con-
densing)
Regulations
For United States:
UL Approved (UL 60950-1)
Meets FCC Class B requirements
For Canada:
UL Approved (CSA 60950-1)
Meets DOC Canada Class B requirements
For Australia/New Zealand:
Meets AS/NZS CISPR.22 Class B
For Europe:
Meets EMC Directive (EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)
Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950-1, TV GS Approved)
For additional information visit:
US : http://www.necdisplay.com/
Europe : http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/
Global : http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html
For information on our optional accessories, visit our website or see our brochure.
The specications are subject to change without notice.
78
7. Appendix
310(12.2)
96(3.8)
2
4
7
(
9
.
7
)
6
8
.
4
(
2
.
7
)
9
5
(
3
.
7
)
@ Cabinet Dimensions
Lens center
Lens center
Unit: mm (inch)
NP215
NP216
NP210/NP115/NP110
79
7. Appendix
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
@ Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector
Signal Level
Video signal : 0.7Vp-p (Analog)
Sync signal : TTL level
5 1 4 2 3
10
11 12 13 14 15
6 9 7 8
Pin No. RGB Signal (Analog) YCbCr Signal
1 Red Cr
2 Green or Sync on Green Y
3 Blue Cb
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 Red Ground Cr Ground
7 Green Ground Y Ground
8 Blue Ground Cb Ground
9 No Connection
10 Sync Signal Ground
11 No Connection
12 Bi-directional DATA (SDA)
13 Horizontal Sync or Composite Sync
14 Vertical Sync
15 Data Clock
80
7. Appendix
@ Compatible Input Signal List
Horizontal: 15KHz to 100KHz (RGB: 24KHz or over)
Vertical: 50Hz to 120Hz (Signals with higher than refresh rate 85 Hz support resolutions of 1024 x 768 or lower.)
Signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Frequency H.
(kHz)
Refresh Rate
(Hz)
VIDEO
NTSC/PAL60 15.73 60.00
PAL/SECAM 15.63 50.00
IBM compatible
640 480 31.47 59.94
640 480 31.48 59.95
640 480 37.86 72.81
640 480 37.50 75.00
640 480 43.27 85.01
800 600 35.16 56.25
800 600 37.88 60.32
800 600 48.08 72.19
800 600 46.88 75.00
800 600 53.67 85.06
1024 768 48.36 60.00
1024 768 56.48 70.07
1024 768 60.02 75.03
1024 768 68.68 85.00
1280 768 47.78 59.87
1280 800 49.70 59.81
1280 960 60.00 60.00
1280 1024 63.98 60.02
1400 1050 - 60.00
1600 1200 75.00 60.02
Apple Macintosh
640 480 35.00 66.67
832 624 49.72 74.55
1024 768 60.24 74.93
HDTV
720p 1280 720 37.50 50.00
720p 1280 720 45.00 60.00
1080i 1920 1080 28.13 50.00
1080i 1920 1080 33.75 60.00
SDTV
480p 31.47 59.94
576p 31.25 50.00
DVD YCbCr
15.73 59.94
15.63 50.00
NOTE:
An image with higher resolution than the projectors native resolution (NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 / NP115/NP110: 800 x
600) will be displayed with scaling technology.
Signals other than those specifed in the table above may not be displayed correctly. If this should happen, change the refresh
rate or resolution on your PC. Refer to Display Properties help section of your PC for procedures.
Sync on Green and Composite sync signals are not supported.
81
7. Appendix
NOTE: Contact your local dealer for a full list of the PC Control Codes if needed.
Cable Connection
Communication Protocol
Baud rate .........................................38400 bps
Data length ......................................8 bits
Parity ...............................................No parity
Stop bit ............................................One bit
X on/off ............................................None
Communications procedure .............Full duplex
NOTE: Depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs.
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)
@ PC Control Codes and Cable Connection
PC Control Codes
Function Code Data
POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H
POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 1 (NP216 only) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH
INPUT SELECT VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H
PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H
SOUND MUTE ON 02H 12H 00H 00H 00H 14H
SOUND MUTE OFF 02H 13H 00H 00H 00H 15H
NOTE 1: Pins 1, 4, 6 and 9 are no used.
NOTE 2: Jumper Request to Send and Clear to Send together on both ends of the cable to simplify cable connection.
NOTE 3: For long cable runs it is recommended to set communication speed within projector menus to 9600 bps.
1 5 2 4 3
6 7 9 8
To GND of PC
To RxD of PC
To TxD of PC
To RTS of PC
To CTS of PC
82
7. Appendix
No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector.
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
rst, then start the PC.
Enabling your notebook PCs signal output to the projector.
A combination of function keys will enable/disable the exter-
nal display. Usually, the combination of the Fn key along
with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display
on or off.
No image (blue or black background, no display).
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJ.
button.
Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projectors menu.
Signal cables plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen.
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available.
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast.
Input sources resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector.
@ Troubleshooting Check List
Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by
referring to the Troubleshooting section in your users manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem
more efciently.
* Print this page and the next page for your check.
Frequency of occurrence always sometimes (How often?_____________________) other (__________________)
Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also Status
Indicator (STATUS).
Power cables plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.
Lamp cover is installed correctly.
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement.
No power even though you press and hold the POWER button
for 1 second.
Shut down during operation.
Lamp cover is installed correctly .
[AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO
POWER OFF] function).
[OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]
function).
Video and Audio
Image is too dark.
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast.
Image is distorted.
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment).
Parts of the image are lost.
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ. but-
ton.
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projectors menu.
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.
Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal.
projector.
Some pixels are lost.
Image is ickering.
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ. but-
ton.
projectors menu.
Image shows ickering or color drift on a computer signal.
Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from
[HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO].
Image appears blurry or out of focus.
Still unchanged even though you checked the signals resolution
on PC and changed it to projectors native resolution.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
No sound.
Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level.
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models
with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Other
Remote control does not work.
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the
remote control.
Projector is placed near a uorescent light that can disturb the
infrared remote controls.
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in
the menu.
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button
for a minimum of 10 seconds.
83
7. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Projector
Model number:
Serial No.:
Date of purchase:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Eco Mode: Off On
Information on input signal:
Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHz
Vertical synch frequency [ ] Hz
Synch polarity H (+) ()
V (+) ()
Synch type Separate Composite
Sync on Green
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light Orange Green
Flashing light [ ] cycles
Remote control model number:
Signal cable
NEC standard or other manufacturers cable?
Model number: Length: inch/m
Distribution amplier
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
Projector
PC
DVD player
Installation environment
Screen size: inch
Screen type: White matte Beads Polarization
Wide angle High contrast
Throw distance: feet/inch/m
Orientation: Ceiling mount Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Connected directly to wall outlet
Connected to power cord extender or other (the
number of connected equipment______________)
Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
of connected equipment______________)
Computer
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Notebook PC / Desktop
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Other:
Video equipment
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
Manufacturer:
Model number:
84
7. Appendix
@ TravelCare Guide
TravelCare - a service for international travelers
This product is eligible for TravelCare, NECs unique international
warranty.
Please note that TravelCare coverage differs in part from coverage under
the warranty included with the product.
Services offered with TravelCare
This warranty allows customers to receive service on their product at the
NEC and NEC-designated service stations in the countries listed herein
when temporarily traveling internationally for business or pleasure.
For details on services offered by the different service stations, please
refer to the List of TravelCare Outlets below.
1 Repair services
The product will be repaired and delivered within 10 business days,
not including shipping time.
During the term of warranty, the cost of maintenance parts, labor costs
for repairs and shipping costs within the service stations coverage
area are covered by the warranty.
2 Replacement product rental service
If the customer desires, he or she can rent a replacement product
while the original product is being repaired.
Fee: US$200 for 12 days
This fee must be paid at the local service station in cash or credit
card.
The US$200 rental fee is non-refundable even if the customer rents
it less than 12 days before returning.
The replacement product will be delivered within 3 business days.
If the customer did not return the replacement product within 12 days,
the customer will be charged the price of the unit.
If the customer returned the replacement product in a faulty or dam-
aged condition, the repair cost will be charged to the customer.
Note that this service is not offered in all countries and regions. Please
refer to the List of TravelCare Outlets.
In addition, this replacement product rental service is not offered after
the products warranty has expired.
Term of warranty
1
a. Upon presentation of the warranty or receipt received upon
purchase:
Valid for the term indicated on the warranty or the normal term
of warranty for the country of purchase.
b. When only the product is brought in:
Valid for a period of within 14 months of the date of manufacture
indicated by the serial number attached to the product.
2 When a product whose term of warranty is expired is brought in:
Repairs will be offered for a fee. In this case the customer is not eligible
for the replacement product rental service.
3 In the following cases, repairs may be charged, even if the products
warranty is still in effect:
1) If the term of warranty, model name, serial number and name of
the store of purchase are not indicated on the warranty or have
been altered.
2) Problems or damage caused by dropping or shocks during ship-
ment or movement by the customer or by improper handling by
the customers.
3) Problems or damage caused by improper usage or unwarrantable
alterations or repairs by the customer.
4) Problems or damage caused by re, salt damage, gas damage,
earthquakes, lightning damage, storm or ood damage or other
natural disasters or such external factors as dust, cigarette
smoke, abnormal voltage, etc.
5) Problems or damage caused by use in hot or humid places, in
vehicles, boats or ships, etc.
6) Problems or damage caused by expendable supplies or devices
connected to the product other than those designated by NEC.
7) Problems caused by natural consumption, wear or deterioration
of parts under normal usage conditions.
8) Problems or damage to lamps and other expendable supplies,
included parts or optional parts.
9) Other conditions stipulated in the warranty included with the
product also apply.
NOTE: The product can be used overseas with voltages indicated in the rating
label on the product by using a power cable suited for the standards and power
source voltage of the country in which the product is being used.
List of TravelCare Outlets
This list applies as of December 1, 2009.
For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the websites of
the service stations in the various countries on the List of TravelCare
Outlets or to the NEC website at http://www.nec-display.com/global/
index.html
In Europe
NEC Europe Ltd. / European Technical Centre
Address: Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
Telephone: +44 1952 237000
Fax Line: +44 1952 237006
Email Address: AFR@uk.neceur.com
WEB Address: http://www.neceur.com
(Regions Covered)
EU: Austria*, Belgium*, Bulgaria*, Czech Republic*, Cyprus*,
Denmark*, Estonia*, Finland*, France*, Germany*,
Greece*, Hungary*, Ireland*, Italy*, Latvia*, Lithuania*,
Luxembourg*, Malta*, The Netherlands*, Poland*, Portu-
gal*, Romania*, Slovakia*, Slovenia*, Spain*, Sweden*
and the United Kingdom*
EEA: Norway*, Iceland and Liechtenstein
In North America
NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc.
Address: 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100 Itasca, Illinois
60143, U.S.A.
Telephone: +1 800 836 0655
Fax Line: +1 800 356 2415
Email Address: vsd.tech-support@necdisplay.com
WEB Address: http://www.necdisplay.com/
(Regions Covered)
U.S.A. *, Canada*
In Oceania
AWA Limited.
Address: 151 Arthur Street
Homebush West NSW 2140 Australia
Customer Call Centre
Telephone: 0297647777
Fax Line: 1300772688
Email Address: commercialsupport@awa.com.au
For Travel Care service, while customer is in Australia, the cus-
tomer will contact AWA on 1300366144, select Option 4. If you
want to book warranty service by email customer goes to:
commercialsupport@awa.com.au.
(Regions Covered)
Australia
Visual Group Ltd.
Address: 28 Walls Road Penrose Auckland New Zealand
Fax Line: 095809607
Email Address: sarah.reed@visualgroup.co.nz
(Regions Covered)
New Zealand
NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental
service are offered.
85
7. Appendix
NEC Corporation of Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
Address: 33rd Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P. Ram-
lee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Telephone: +6 03 2178 3600 (ISDN)
Fax Line: +6 03 2178 3789
Email Address: necare@nsm.nec.co.jp
WEB Address: http://www.necmalaysia.com.my/home.html
(Regions Covered)
Malaysia
Hyosung ITX Co., Ltd.
Address: 1st Fl., Ire B/D. #2, 4Ga, Yangpyeng-Dong,
Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul, Korea 150-967
Telephone: +82 2 2163 4193
Fax Line: +82 2 2163 4196
Email Address: moneybear@hyosung.com
(Regions Covered)
South Korea
Lenso Communication Co., Ltd.
Address: 292 Lenso House 4, 1st Floor, Srinakarin
Road, Huamark, Bangkapi, Bangkok 10240,
Thailand
Telephone: +66 2 375 2425
Fax Line: +66 2 375 2434
Email Address: pattara@lenso.com
WEB Address: http://www.lensocom.com/
(Regions Covered)
Thailand
e-ex L.L.C.
Address: Al Suwaidi Road, Rashidiya 43500 Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 2861533
Fax Line: +971 4 2861544
Email Address: sc@eex.ae
(Regions Covered)
United Arab Emirates
Samir Photographic Supplies
Address: P.O.Box 599, Jeddah 21421, Saudi Arabia
Telephone: +966 2 6828219
Fax Line: +966 2 6830820
Email Address: Mohamed.asif@samirgroup.com
(Regions Covered)
Saudi Arabia
NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental
service are offered.
In Asia and Middle East
NEC Display Solutions, Ltd.
Address: 686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun,
Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan
Telephone: +81 465 85 2369
Fax Line: +81 465 85 2393
Email Address: support_pjweb@gw.necds.nec.co.jp
WEB Address: http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html
(Regions Covered)
Japan*
NEC Solutions (China) Co.,Ltd.
Address: Rm 1903, Shining Building, 35 Xueyuan Rd,
Haidian District Beijing 100083, P.R.C.
Telephone: +8610 82317788
Fax Line: +8610 82331722
Email Address: zheng_zheng@nec.cn
lily@nec.cn
WEB Address: http://www.necsl.com.cn
(Regions Covered)
China
NEC Hong Kong Ltd.
Address: 25/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis
Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Telephone: +852 2369 0335
Fax Line: +852 2795 6618
Email Address: nechksc@nechk.nec.com.hk
esmond_au@nechk.nec.com.hk
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.hk
(Regions Covered)
Hong Kong
NEC Taiwan Ltd.
Address: 7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Telephone: +886 2 8500 1700
Fax Line: +886 2 8500 1420
Email Address: eric@nec.com.tw
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.tw
(Regions Covered)
Taiwan
NEC Asia Pte.Ltd.
Address: 401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par
Technocentre, Singapore 149598
Telephone: +65 6 273 8333
Fax Line: +65 6 274 2226
Email Address: ncare@nec.com.sg
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.sg/
(Regions Covered)
Singapore
86
7. Appendix
TO: NEC or NECs Authorized Service Station:
FM:
(Company & Name with signature)
Dear Sir (s),
I would like to apply your TravelCare Service Program based on attached registration and qualication sheet and agree with your
following conditions, and also the Service fee will be charged to my credit card account, if I dont return the Loan units within the
specied period. I also conrm following information is correct. Regards.
Application Sheet for TravelCare Service Program
P-1/ ,
Date: / / ,
Country,
product purchased :
Users Company Name :
Users Company Address :
Phone No., Fax No. :
Users Name :
Users Address :
Local Contact ofce :
Local Contact ofce Address :
Users Model Name :
Date of Purchase :
Serial No. on cabinet :
Problem of units per User :
Required Service : (1) Repair and Return (2) Loan unit
Requested period of Loan unit :
Payment method : (1) Credit Card (2) Travelers Cheque (3) Cash
In Case of Credit Card :
Card No. w/Valid Date :
87
7. Appendix
5. Loan Service Charges and Conditions:
Upon acceptance of this NEC Projector, Customer agrees to assume
liability for this loan unit.
The current cost of use of this loan unit is US$200 for 12 calendar
days.
If Customer does not return the unit within the 12 calendar days, Cus-
tomer will be charged the next highest cost up to and including the full
list price to Credit Cards, which price will be informed by NEC Authorized
Service Stations. Please see the attached listing of contacts for each
country to arrange for pickup of the loan unit.

If you return to their country of origin with the loan unit, you will be charged
additional freight to return the unit to the loaning country.
Thank you for your understanding of this program.
Condition of your TravelCare Service Program
Enduser is requested to understand following condition of TravelCare
Service Program and complete the necessary information on the ap-
plication sheet.
1. Service Options:
There are 3 types of [Service] available. Enduser has to understand
following condition and is required to ll in the Application Sheet.
1) Repair and Return:
The Faulty unit is sent or collected from the customer. It is repaired
and returned within 10 days to the customer, excluding transport
time.
There may have a case, repair and return cant be done by NEC
Authorized Service Station, because of shortage of spare parts due
to same model is not sold in the territory.
2) Repair and Return with Loan: (This service is limited to some Service
Stations)
This service is offered to the Enduser, who cannot wait until their unit
is repaired.
The customer can borrow a unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer
then sends in inoperable unit to nearest NEC Authorized Service
Station for service. In order to prevent collection problem, Enduser
is required to ll in Application Sheet.
Enduser needs to conrm the availability of the Service to NEC
Authorized Service Stations.
3) Loan Only:
For this service, NEC Authorized Service Station supplies the cus-
tomer with a loan unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer keeps the
inoperable unit and when customer returns home, customer arranges
to have the projector serviced in the home country.
2. Warranty Exclusions:
This program does not apply if the Projectors serial number has been
defaced, modied or removed.
If, in the judgement of NEC Authorized Service Station or its agent the
defects or failures result from any cause other than fair wear and tear or
NEC neglect, or fault including the following without limitation:
1) Accidents, transportation, neglect, misuse, abuse, water, dust, smoke
or default of or by the Customer its employees or agents or any third
party;
2) Failure or uctuation of electrical power, electrical circuitry, air con-
ditioning, humidity control or other environmental conditions such as
use it in smoking area;
3) Any fault in the attachments or associated products or components
(whether or not supplied by NEC or its agents which do not form part
of the Product covered by this warranty);
4) Any act of God, re, ood, war, act of violence or any similar occur-
rence;
5) Any attempt by any person other than any person authorized by NEC
to adjust, modify, repair, install or service the product.
6) Any Cross-border charges such as, duty, insurance, tax etc.
3. Charges for Warranty Exclusions and Out of Warranty Case:
In case faulty unit is under warranty exclusions case or under Out of
Warranty period, NEC Authorized Service Station will Inform estimation
of actual service cost to the Enduser with reason.
4. Dead on Arrival (DOA):
Enduser must take this issue up with their original supplier in the country
of purchase.
NEC Authorized Service Station will repair the DOA unit as a Warranty
repair, but will not exchange DOA unit with new units.
NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010 7N951472
Portable Projector
NP216/NP215/NP210/
NP115/NP110
Troubleshooting
Check List
English
Franais
Espaol
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market
EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur.
The NP210 is not distributed in North America.
Le modle NP210 nest pas distribu en Amrique du Nord.
El NP210 no se distribuye en Estados Unidos.
E-1
How to Use the Supplied User Documents
The following user documents are included with the projector.
First read Important Information. It covers information about projector safety, cautions, lamp replacement and
troubleshooting.
Quick Setup Guide
The Quick Setup Guide provides initial setup and usage information regarding source connection, turning on the
power, selecting a source and other basic operating instructions.
Users Manual on CD-ROM
The complete users manual is supplied on the NEC Projector CD-ROM in PDF (Portable Document Format) and
provides detailed product and usage information for your NEC projector.
The users manual is available in 11 languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish,
Russian, Korean, simplied Chinese and Japanese).
To view or print the PDF les Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader is required.
NOTE: Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader can be downloaded from Adobes website.
Visit http://www.adobe.com and obtain the current version for your OS.
To view the users manual (PDF)
[Windows]
1. Place the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM in your computers CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the Windows desktop.
3. Double-click the [NECPJ] CD-ROM icon.
4. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
5. Click [Users Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
6. Click the chapter title you want to view.
[Macintosh]
1. Place the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM in your Macintoshs CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [NECPJ] CD-ROM icon on your Macintoshs Desktop.
3. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
4. Click [Users Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
5. Click the chapter title you want to view.
To copy the Users Manual (PDF) to your computer:
The users manuals on the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM can be copied to your computer hard drive.
From the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM, select [manual] [English] [NP216_index_E.pdf] and [NP216_
manual_E.pdf] and copy them to your computer hard drive.
See the Users manual (PDF format) on the
supplied CD-ROM for detailed information.
English
E-2
Whats in the Box?
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
Projector
Lens cap
(24F45801)
Power cable
(US: 7N080236)
(EU: 7N080022)
VGA signal cable
(7N520073)
Users manual
(7N951472)
For North America only
Registration card
Limited warranty
For customers in Europe:
You will fnd our current valid Guarantee
Policy on our Web Site:
For North America
Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731)
Important Information (7N8N0752)
For other countries than North
America
Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731 and
7N8N0741)
Important Information (7N8N0752
and 7N8N0762)
Remote control
(7N900881)
Batteries (AAAx2)
E-3
Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector and keep
the manual handy for future reference.
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufcient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNITS PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-
tions.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,
The highest sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) in accordance with EN ISO 7779.
Disposing of your used product
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handling the cables supplied with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic
products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This in-
cludes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please
follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product.
After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us
reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human
health and the environment at the minimum level.
The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member
States.
E-4
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specied by NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regu-
lation could void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (ve Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent re and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
Do not place the projector in the following conditions:
- on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
- near water, baths, or damp rooms.
- in direct sunlight, near heaters, or heat radiating appliances.
- in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment.
- on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets.
If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
- Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
- The projector must be installed by qualied technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk
of bodily injury.
- In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance
with any local building codes.
- Please consult your dealer for more information.
WARNING
Do not cover the lens with the lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of
the cap due to the heat emitted from the light output.
Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens. Doing so could lead
to the object melting from the heat that is emitted from the light output.

E-5
Fire and Shock Precautions
Ensure that there is sufcient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the front side as it can become heated while the projector is turned on
and immediately after the projector is turned off.

Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to retrieve
any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver into
your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object removed
by a qualied service personnel.
Do not place any objects on top of the projector.
Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or re.
The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply
ts this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.

Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause
unpredictable outcome such as re or injury to the eyes.
Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of a projector exhaust vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the
exhaust.
Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or re.
- Do not use any power cables than the supplied one.
- Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively.
- Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object.
- Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs.
- Do not heat the power cable.
- Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the projector serviced by a qualied service personnel
under the following conditions:
- When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed.
- If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.
10
Place the projector in a horizontal position
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other
than the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
E-6
- If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user's manual.
- If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
- If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector.
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp.
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable if the projector is not to be used for an extended period of
time.
When using a LAN cable (NP216/NP215 only):
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage.
CAUTION
Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or
hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside the
soft case could be damaged.
Select [HIGH] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[SETUP] [OPTIONS(1)] [FAN MODE] [HIGH].)
Do not turn off the AC power for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blink-
ing green.
Doing so could cause premature lamp failure.
Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if
the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation.
Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into re.
Ensure that you have the batteries' polarity (+/) aligned correctly.
Lamp Replacement
Use the specied lamp for safety and performance.
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page E-9.
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE.
PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end
of its usable life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch
them as the pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source.
A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on
and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.
E-7
CAUTION:
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off
When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass
fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.
Note for US Residents
The lamp in this product contains mercury. Please dispose according to Local,
State or Federal Laws.
Health precautions to users viewing 3D images
Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the users manual included with
your LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video
les and the like.
- Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close
a distance can strain your eyes.
- Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every
hour of viewing.
- If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing
3D images.
About High Altitude mode
Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters
or higher.
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]
can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and
turn on the projector.
Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE]
can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to icker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical com-
ponents such as the lamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures:
Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue
such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with the following func-
tions may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.
[ASPECT RATIO], [KEYSTONE], Magnifying feature and other similar features.
This device is not intended for use in the direct eld of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid incommoding reec-
tions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct eld of view.
E-8
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
Note on Cleaning the Lens
Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
Vacuum the ventilation
inlet of the cabinet.
E-9
Replacing the Lamp
When the lamp reaches the end of its life, the LAMP indicator in the cabinet will blink red. Even though the lamp
may still be working, replace the lamp to maintain the optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be
sure to clear the lamp hour meter. ( page 68 (User's Manual))
CAUTION
Use the specied lamp for safety and performance.
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except one lamp cover screw and three lamp housing screws. You could
receive an electric shock.
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep nger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving nger prints on the glass surface might
cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100
hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue
to use the lamp after the lamp reaches the end of its life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be
scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact
your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
*NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions:
for one minute after the projector has been powered on
when the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control is pressed
To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
To replace the lamp:
Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
Replacement lamp: NP13LP
Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
E-10
2. Remove the lamp housing.
(1) Loosen the three screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling
condition.
The three screws are not removable.
There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this
interlock.
(2) Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
1. Remove the lamp cover.
(1) Loosen the lamp cover screw
The lamp cover screw is not removable.
(2) Push and slide the lamp cover off.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the lamp housing is cool
enough to before removing it.
Interlock
E-11
5. Connect the supplied power cable, and turn on the projector.
6. Finally, select the menu [RESET] [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life, the projector
cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.

4. Reattach the lamp cover.
(1) Slide the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
(2) Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover.
Be sure to tighten the screw.
3. Install a new lamp housing.
(1) Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp NP13LP.
Order this from your NEC dealer.
(2) Push the top center of the lamp housing to secure it.
(3) Secure it in place with the three screws.
Be sure to tighten the screws.
Hold the cabinet with your hand to keep it from tilting while you tighten the screw.
E-12
Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Off The power cable is unplugged.
Blinking light Green 0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
2.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
Off Timer is enabled.
Steady light Green The projector is turned on.
Orange [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE]
Red [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY
MODE]
Status Indicator
Off
Normal or Standby ([POWER-SAVING] for
[STANDBY MODE])
Blinking light Red 1 cycle (0.5 sec

On, 2.5 sec Off)
Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp housing cor-
rectly.
2 cycle (0.5 sec
On, 0.5 sec Off)
Temperature error The projector is overheated. Move the projector to
a cooler location.
4 cycle (0.5 sec
On, 0.5 sec Off)
Fan error Fans will not work correctly.
6 cycle (0.5 sec
On, 0.5 sec Off)
Lamp error Lamp fails to light. Wait a full minute and then
turn on again.
Green Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cooling
down.)
The projector is re-ring.
Wait for a moment.
Steady light Green Standby ([NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE])
Orange Cabinet button is locked You have pressed cabinet button when Cabinet
Button is locked.
CONTROL ID error Remote control ID and projector ID are not
matched.
Lamp Indicator
Off Normal
Blinking light Red Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp replace-
ment message will be displayed.
Replace the lamp.
Steady light Red Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The projec-
tor will not turn on until the lamp is replaced.
Replace the lamp.
Green [ECO MODE] is set to [ON]
Over-Temperature Protection
If the temperature inside the projector rises too high, the over-temperature protector will automatically turn off the
lamp with the STATUS indicator blinking (2-cycle On and Off.)
Should this happen, do the following:
Unplug the power cable after the cooling fans stop.
Move the projector to a cooler location if the room where you are presenting is particularly too warm.
Clean the ventilation holes if they are clogged with dust.
Wait about 60 minutes until the inside of the projector becomes cool enough.
E-13
Common Problems & Solutions ( Power/Status/Lamp Indicator on page E-12.)
(The numbers in the table refer to pages in the Users Manual)
Problem Check These Items
Does not turn on
or shut down
Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. ( pages 17 and 18)
Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. ( page 72)
Check to see if the projector has overheated. If there is insufcient ventilation around the projector or if the
room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
Check to see if you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its
life. If so, replace the lamp. After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used. ( page 68)
The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700
meters or higher. Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without
setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down. If this
happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. ( page 61)
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image
for some time and then the projector will display the image. Wait for a moment.
Will turn off Ensure that the [OFF TIMER] or [AUTO POWER OFF] is off. ( page 63, 64)
No picture Use the COMPUTER1, the VIDEO or the S-VIDEO button on the remote control to select your source (Com-
puter, Video or S-Video). ( page 20) If there is still no picture, press the button again.
Ensure your cables are connected properly.
Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. ( page 49)
Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the [RESET] in the Menu. ( page 68)
Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. ( page 32)
Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning
on the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector
before being powered up.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computers screen-
saver or power management software.
See also the next page .
Picture suddenly be-
comes dark
Check if the projector is in the Forced ECO mode because of too high ambient temperature. If this is the case,
lower the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]. ( page 61)
Color tone or hue is
unusual
Check if an appropriate color is selected in [WALL COLOR]. If so, select an appropriate option. ( page 55)
Adjust [HUE] in [PICTURE]. ( page 49)
Image isnt square to
the screen
Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. ( page 24)
Picture is blurred Adjust the focus. ( page 23)
Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens.
( page 10)
Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Flicker appears on
screen
Set [FAN MODE] to other than [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode when using the projector at altitudes approximately
5500 feet/1700 meters or lower. Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700
meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to icker. Switch
[FAN MODE] to [AUTO]. ( page 61)
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
Check the computer's resolution and frequency. Make sure that the resolution you are trying to display is
supported by the projector. ( page 80)
Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the [IMAGE OPTIONS]. ( page 52)
Remote control does
not work
Install new batteries.( page 8)
Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. ( page 8)
Make sure that the remote control's ID corresponds with the projector's ID. ( page 60)
Indicator is lit or blink-
ing
See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator. ( page 73)
Cross color in RGB
mode
Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. ( page 26)
Adjust the computer image manually with [CLOCK]/[PHASE] in [IMAGE OPTIONS] in the menu. ( page
51)
LAN control is not ac-
tive or PC Control is not
active
Make sure that [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set correctly. ( page 64)
Cannot control the
projector from external
equipment
Check to see if [STANDBY MODE] is set to [POWER-SAVING] and if it is, try to set it to [NORMAL]. ( page
63)
3D picture is not
display
See "Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images" on page 42.
For more information contact your dealer.
E-14
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
Power on process for the projector and the PC.
Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on
the power to the notebook PC.
being powered up.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projectors menu under Information. If it reads
0kHz, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. ( page 67 (User's Manual) or go to next step)
Enabling the computers external display.
Displaying an image on the notebook PCs screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projec-
tor. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the Fn key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come
on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle
through external display selections.
Non-standard signal output from the computer
If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PCs LCD screen when the projector display is in use.
Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previ-
ous step. Refer to your computers documentation for detailed information.
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh
When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projec-
tor) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP
switch to the 13" xed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a display-
able mode and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless mirror-
ing is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owners manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen
Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] [Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
F-1
Voici comment utiliser les documents utilisateur fournis
Les documents suivants destins lutilisateur sont fournis avec le projecteur.
Informations importantes
Lire dabord la section sur les informations importantes. Elle donne des informations sur la scurit du projecteur,
les prcautions observer, le remplacement de la lampe et la localisation des pannes.
Guide dinstallation rapide
Le guide dinstallation rapide dcrit linstallation initiale et donne des informations dutilisation concernant la connexion
la source, la mise sous tension, la slection dune source et dautres instructions dutilisation de base.
Mode demploi fourni avec le CD-ROM
Le mode demploi est fourni avec le NEC Projector CD-ROM en format PDF (Portable Document Format) et donne
des informations dtailles sur le produit et lutilisation pour votre projecteur NEC.
Le mode demploi complet est disponible en 11 langues (anglais, allemand, franais, italien, espagnol, portugais,
sudois, russe, coren, chinois simpli et japonais).
Pour visualiser ou imprimer les chiers PDF Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader.
REMARQUE: Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader peut tre tlcharg du site Internet de Adobe.
Visiter le site http://www.adobe.com et tlcharger la version actuelle correspondant votre systme dexploitation.
Pour visualiser le mode demploi (PDF)
[Windows]
1. Insrer le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de votre ordinateur.
2. Double-cliquer sur licne [Poste de travail] sur le bureau de Windows.
3. Double-cliquer sur licne [NECPJ] CD-ROM.
4. Double-cliquer sur licne [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader dmarre et vous permet de visualiser le menu Dmarrer.
5. Cliquer sur [Mode demploi].
Le menu Index safche.
6. Cliquer sur le titre du chapitre visualiser.
[Macintosh]
1. Insrer le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de votre Macintosh.
2. Double-cliquer sur licne [NECPJ] CD-ROM sur le bureau de votre Macintosh.
3. Double-cliquer sur licne [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader dmarre et vous permet de visualiser le menu Dmarrer.
4. Cliquer sur [Mode demploi].
Le menu Index safche.
5. Cliquer sur le titre du chapitre visualiser.
Pour copier le manuel dutilisateur (PDF) sur votre ordinateur:
Les mode demploi dans le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni peuvent tre copis sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur.
Dans le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni, slectionner [manual] [French] [NP216_index_F.pdf] et [NP216_
manual_F.pdf] et les copier sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur.
Pour plus de dtails, consultez le mode demploi
(format PDF) prsent sur le CD-ROM fourni.
Franais
F-2
Projecteur
Cache-objectif
(24F45801)
Cble dalimentation
(US: 7N080236)
(EU: 7N080022)
Cble de signal VGA
(7N520073)
Mode demploi
(7N951472)
Pour lAmrique du Nord
Guide de rglage rapide
(7N8N0731)
Informations Importantes
(7N8N0752)
Pour les pays autres que lAm-
rique du Nord
Guide de rglage rapide
(7N8N0731 et 7N8N0741)
Informations Importantes
(7N8N0752 et 7N8N0762)
Tlcommande
(7N900881)
Piles (AAAx2)
Que contient la bote ?
Sassurer que la bote contient tous les lments de la liste. Sil manque des pices, contacter votre revendeur.
Veuillez conserver la bote et lemballage dorigine au cas o vous auriez besoin de transporter votre projecteur.
Pour lAmrique du Nord uniquement
Carte denregistrement
Limitation de garantie
Pour les clients en Europe :
Vous trouverez notre garantie actuelle valide
sur notre site Web : www.nec-display-solutions.
com
F-3
Consignes de scurit
Prcautions
Veuillez lire ce manuel avec attention avant dutiliser votre projecteur NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 et
gardez ce manuel porte de main an de pouvoir y recourir facilement.
ATTENTION
Pour couper compltement lalimentation, retirez la prise du secteur.
La prise du secteur doit tre accessible et installe le plus prs possible de lappareil.
ATTENTION
POUR VITER TOUT CHOC LECTRIQUE, NOUVREZ PAS LE BOTIER.
A LINTRIEUR SE TROUVENT DES COMPOSANTS HAUTE TENSION.
POUR TOUTE RPARATION, ADRESSEZ-VOUS UN RPARATEUR AGRE.
Ce symbole avertit lutilisateur que le contact avec certaines parties non isoles lintrieur de lappareil risque
de causer une lectrocution. Il est donc dangereux de toucher quoi que ce soit lintrieur de lappareil.
Ce symbole avertit lutilisateur que dimportantes informations sont fournies sur le fonctionnement ou len-
tretien de cet appareil.
Ces informations doivent tre lues attentivement pour viter tout problme.
AVERTISSEMENT : AFIN DE PREVENIR TOUT RISQUE DINCENDIE OU DE CHOC LECTRIQUE, NEXPO-
SEZ PAS CET APPAREIL LA PLUIE OU LHUMIDIT.
NE PAS UTILISER DE RALLONGE AVEC LA PRISE DE CETTE APPAREIL ET NE PAS NON PLUS LA BRAN-
CHER DANS UNE PRISE MURALE SI TOUTES LES FICHES NE PEUVENT TRE INSRES COMPLTE-
MENT.
DOC Avis de conformation (pour le Canada uniquement)
Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le Matriel Brouilleur du
Canada.
Mise au rebut du produit usag
La lgislation europenne, applique dans tous les Etats membres, exige que les produits lectriques
et lectroniques portant la marque ( gauche) doivent tre mis au rebut sparment des autres ordures
mnagres. Ceci inclus les projecteurs et leurs accessoires lectriques ou lampes. Lorsque vous mettez
au rebut ces produits, veuillez suivre les recommandations des autorits locales et/ou demandez conseil
au magasin qui vous a vendu le produit.
Une fois ces produits mis au rebut, ils sont recycls et de manire approprie. Cet effort nous aidera
rduire les dchets et leurs consquences ngatives, comme par exemple celles causes par le mercure
des lampes sur la sant humaine et sur lenvironnement, mme faibles doses.
La marque gurant sur les produits lectriques et lectroniques ne sapplique quaux Etats membres
actuels de lUnion Europenne.
F-4
Mesures de scurit importantes
Ces instructions de scurit garantissent la longvit de votre projecteur et prviennent les risques dincendie et de
dcharge lectrique. Lisez-les et respectez les conseils.
Installation
Ne placez pas le projecteur dans les endroits suivants :
- sur un chariot, un support ou une table instable.
- prs dun point deau, dun bain ou dans des pices humides.
- la lumire directe du soleil, prs de chauffages ou dappareils mettant de la chaleur.
- dans un environnement poussireux, enfum ou embu.
- sur une feuille de papier, une carpette ou un tapis.
Si vous voulez installer le projecteur au plafond :
- Ne pas essayer dinstaller le projecteur soi-mme.
- Le projecteur doit tre install par un technicien quali pour garantir une installation russie et rduire le risque
dventuelles blessures corporelles.
- De plus, le plafond doit tre sufsamment solide pour supporter le projecteur et linstallation doit tre conforme
aux rglementations locales de construction.
- Veuillez consulter votre revendeur pour de plus amples informations.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne couvrez pas lobjectif avec le cache-objectif fourni ni avec un autre objet lorsque le projecteur est en mar-
che. dfaut de respecter cette consigne, la chaleur provenant de lmission de lumire pourrait faire fondre
le capuchon.
Ne placez pas dobjet pouvant tre affect par la chaleur en face de lobjectif du projecteur. dfaut de res-
pecter cette consigne, la chaleur provenant de lmission de lumire pourrait faire fondre cet objet.

Placez le projecteur en position horizontale
Langle dinclinaison du projecteur ne devrait pas excder 10 degrs. Le projecteur ne devrait pas non plus tre install
ailleurs que sur un bureau ou au plafond, sinon la dure de vie de la lampe risque dtre grandement courte.
10
F-5
Prcautions contre lincendie et llectrocution
Veiller ce que la ventilation soit sufsante et ce que les bouches ne soient pas obstrues an dviter toute
accumulation de chaleur lintrieur du projecteur. Laisser un espace dau moins 4 pouces/10 cm entre le projec-
teur et le mur.
Ne pas essayer de toucher la sortie de laration situe sur le ct avant car elle peut devenir brlante lorsque le
projecteur est en marche et juste aprs son extinction.

Eviter de faire tomber des corps trangers comme des trombones et des morceaux de papier dans le projecteur.
Ne pas essayer de rcuprer des objets tombs dans le projecteur. Ne pas insrer dobjet mtallique comme un
l ou un tournevis dans le projecteur. Si quelque chose venait tomber dans le projecteur, le dbrancher imm-
diatement et demander un rparateur quali de retirer lobjet.
Ne placez pas dobjet sur le projecteur.
Ne pas toucher la prise dalimentation pendant un orage. Cela pourrait causer un choc lectrique ou un incendie.
Le projecteur est conu pour fonctionner sur une alimentation de 100-240V CA 50/60 Hz. Assurez-vous que lali-
mentation correspond ces exigences avant de commencer utiliser votre projecteur.
Ne pas regarder dans lobjectif lorsque le projecteur est en marche. Cela pourrait provoquer de graves dommages
oculaires.

Tenir les objets tels quune loupe lcart du rayon de lumire du projecteur. La lumire projete par lobjectif
est puissante, par consquent tout objet pouvant rediriger la lumire provenant de lobjectif peut provoquer des
dangers inattendus comme un incendie ou blesser les yeux.
Ne placez pas dobjet pouvant tre affect par la chaleur en face des orices de ventilation du projecteur.
dfaut de respecter cette consigne, les objets en question pourraient fondre ou vous brler les mains en raison
de la chaleur produite par les orices de ventilation.
Manipulez le cble dalimentation avec prcaution. Un cble endommag ou gratign peut entraner une lec-
trocution ou un incendie.
- Nutilisez aucun autre cble dalimentation que celui fourni.
- Ne pliez pas ou ncrasez pas le cble dalimentation de manire excessive.
- Ne placez pas le cble dalimentation sous le projecteur ou tout autre objet lourd.
- Ne couvrez pas le cble dalimentation avec dautres matriaux doux comme des tapis.
- Ne soumettez pas le cble dalimentation la chaleur.
- Ne manipulez pas la prise dalimentation avec des mains mouilles.
Eteindre le projecteur, dbrancher le cble dalimentation et faire rviser lappareil par un technicien quali dans
le cas des problmes suivants :
- Le cble ou la prise dalimentation est endommag ou gratign.
- Du liquide a t rpandu lintrieur du projecteur, ou ce dernier a t expos la pluie ou leau.
- Le projecteur ne fonctionne pas normalement lorsque vous suivez les instructions dcrites dans ce mode demploi.
- Le projecteur est tomb ou le botier a t endommag.
- Les performances du projecteur ont dclin, indiquant un besoin de maintenance.
Dconnectez le cble dalimentation et tout autre cble avant de transporter le projecteur.
Eteignez le projecteur et dbranchez le cble dalimentation avant de nettoyer le botier ou de remplacer la lampe.
Eteindre le projecteur et dbrancher le cble dalimentation si le projecteur nest pas utilis durant une longue priode.
Lors de lutilisation dun cble LAN (uniquement NP216/NP215) :
Pour votre scurit, ne raccordez pas au connecteur pour priphrique externe de cble pouvant avoir une tension
excessive.
F-6
Prcautions se rapportant la tlcommande
Manipuler la tlcommande avec prcaution.
Si la tlcommande est mouille, lessuyer immdiatement.
Eviter toute chaleur excessive et lhumidit.
Ne pas chauffer, dmonter ou jeter les piles au feu.
Si la tlcommande nest pas utilise pendant une longue priode, retirer les piles.
S'assurer de respecter la polarit (+/) des piles.
Ne pas utiliser des piles neuves et des piles usages en mme temps et ne pas utiliser des piles de diffrents
types ensemble.
Mettre les piles usages au rebut dpars la rglementation locales.
Remplacement de la lampe
Utilisez la lampe fournie pour plus de scurit et de performance.
Pour remplacer la lampe, suivre toutes les instructions de la page F-9.
Veiller remplacer la lampe lorsque le message [LA LAMPE A ATTEINT SA DURE DE VIE MAXIMUM, PRIRE
DE LA REMPLACER.] apparat. Si lon continue utiliser la lampe aprs quelle ait atteint la n de service, lam-
poule de la lampe risque de se briser en clats, et des dbris de verre risquent dtre disperss dans le coffret de
la lampe. Ne les touchez pas car ils peuvent vous blesser.
Si cela se produit, prendre contact avec votre revendeur pour le remplacement de la lampe.
Caractristique de la lampe
Le projecteur utilise une lampe au mercure haute-pression comme source lumineuse.
Les caractristiques de la lampe font que sa luminosit dcline graduellement avec lge.
Egalement, le fait dallumer et dteindre frquemment la lampe favorisera cette perte de luminosit.
ATTENTION:
NE TOUCHEZ PAS LA LAMPE immdiatement aprs quelle a t utilise. Elle sera extrmement chaude.
Eteignez le projecteur puis dbranchez le cble dalimentation. Attendez au moins une heure que la lampe se
soit refroidie avant de la manipuler.
Lors du retrait de la lampe dun projecteur mont au plafond, assurez-vous que personne ne se trouve sous le
projecteur. Des fragments de verre pourraient tomber si la lampe a grill.
ATTENTION
Ne pas utiliser le pied inclinaison rglable pour effectuer des rglages autres que ceux initialement prvus.
Une utilisation non-prvue du pied dinclinaison pour porter ou suspendre le projecteur (au mur ou au plafond)
peut causer des dommages au projecteur.
Ne pas envoyer le projecteur dans la sacoche souple par service dexpdition ou par un transporteur de fret. Le
projecteur se trouvant lintrieur de la sacoche souple pourrait tre endommag.
Slectionner [HAUT] dans le Mode de ventilateur si le projecteur continue tre utilis pendant plusieurs jours
dafle. (A partir du menu, slectionner [PARAM.] [OPTIONS(1)] [MODE VENTILATEUR] [HAUT].)
Ne coupez pas lalimentation AC dans les 60 secondes qui suivent lallumage de la lampe et pendant que le
tmoin POWER clignote en vert.
Cela pourrait causer une panne prmature de la lampe.
Certaines parties du projecteur peuvent se trouver temporairement en surchauffe si le projecteur est teint avec
la touche POWER ou si lalimentation lectrique est coupe pendant une utilisation normale du projecteur.
Faites bien attention quand vous soulevez le projecteur.
F-7
Prcautions de sant pour les utilisateurs qui visionnent des images en 3D
Avant tout visionnage, lisez bien le chapitre consacr aux prcautions de sant dans le manuel utilisateur disponible
avec vos lunettes obturation LC ou avec vos supports compatibles avec le 3D tels que les DVD, jeux vido, chiers
vido de votre ordinateur ou autre matriel du mme type.
An dviter tout symptme gnant, veuillez tenir compte de ce qui suit :
- Nutilisez pas les lunettes obturation LC pour visionner autre chose que des images 3D.
- Respectez une distance dau minimum 2 mtres entre lcran et lutilisateur. Le fait de regarder des images 3D
de trop prs peut vous fatiguer les yeux.
- vitez de regarder des images 3D pendant des priodes prolonges. Faites une pause de 15 minutes ou plus
aprs chaque heure de visionnage.
- Si vous ou lun des membres de votre famille avez dj eu des problmes de crises dues une photosensibilit,
consultez un mdecin avant de regarder des images 3D.
- Si, pendant le visionnage dimages 3D, vous avez des sensations dcurement, des vertiges, maux de tte, les
yeux qui tirent, la vision trouble, des convulsions ou des engourdissements, arrtez le visionnage. Si les symptmes
persistent, consultez un mdecin.
A propos du mode Haute Altitude
Rglez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lorsque le projecteur est utilis des altitudes denviron
5500 pieds/1700 mtres ou plus.
Utiliser le projecteur des altitudes denviron 5500 pieds/1700 mtres sans rgler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut
causer une surchauffe et le projecteur pourrait steindre. Si cela se produit, attendez quelques minutes et allumez
le projecteur.
Utiliser le projecteur des altitudes moins importantes que 5500 pieds/1700 mtres ou encore moins et rgler sur
[HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut provoquer une baisse de temprature trop forte de la lampe, et causer une oscillation
de limage. Commutez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [AUTO].
Utiliser le projecteur des altitudes denviron 5500 pieds/1700 mtres ou plus peut raccourcir la dure de vie des
composants optiques tels que la lampe.
propos des droits dauteur des images originales projetes :
Notez que lutilisation de ce projecteur dans un but commercial ou pour attirer lattention du public dans un lieu comme
un caf ou un htel et lemploi de la compression ou de lextension dimage dcran avec les fonctions suivantes risque
de constituer une infraction aux droits dauteur qui sont protgs par la loi sur les droits dauteur.
[RATIO DASPECT], [KEYSTONE], Fonction de grossissement et autres fonctions semblables.
F-8
Nettoyage du botier et de lobjectif
1. Eteindre le projecteur avant deffectuer le nettoyage.
2. Nettoyer rgulirement le botier avec un chiffon humide. Sil est trs sale, utiliser un dtergent doux. Ne
jamais utiliser de dtergent puissant ou des solvants tels que lalcool ou un dissolvant.
Remarque concernant le nettoyage de lobjectif
Utiliser une brosse soufante ou un papier pour objectif pour nettoyer lobjectif, et veiller ne pas rayer ou dtriorer
lobjectif.
Aspirez la grille darrive de la
ventilation du botier.
F-9
Remplacement de la lampe
Lorsque la lampe atteint sa n de vie, lindicateur LAMP dans le botier va clignoter en rouge. Mme si la lampe fonc-
tionne encore, remplacez la lampe pour maintenir une performance de projection optimale. Aprs avoir remplac la
lampe, penser remettre le compteur dheures zro. ( page 68 (Mode demploi))
ATTENTION
Utilisez la lampe fournie pour plus de scurit et de performance.
NE PAS TOUCHER LA LAMPE juste aprs l'avoir utilise. Elle est extrmement chaude. teignez le projecteur
puis dconnectez le cble dalimentation. Laissez la lampe refroidir pendant au moins une heure avant de la ma-
nipuler.
NE RETIRER AUCUNE VIS lexception de la vis du couvercle de la lampe et des trois vis du compartiment de
la lampe. Une dcharge lectrique pourrait en rsulter.
Ne pas briser le verre sur le botier de la lampe.
Ne pas laisser dempreintes sur la surface en verre du botier de la lampe. Laisser des empreintes sur la surface
en verre peut causer une ombre indsirable et une image de mauvaise qualit.
Le projecteur steint et se met en mode veille lorsque vous continuez dutiliser le projecteur ds 100 heures
aprs la n de vie de la lampe. Dans ce cas, remplacer la lampe. Si cela se produit, assurez-vous de remplacer la
lampe. Si vous continuez dutiliser la lampe aprs quelle soit usage, la lampoule peut se fracasser et des bris
de verre peuvent se disperser dans la base de la lampe. Ne les touchez pas car ils peuvent vous blesser. Si cela
se produit, prendre contact avec votre revendeur NEC pour le remplacement de la lampe.
* REMARQUE : Ce message safchera dans les conditions suivantes :
pendant une minute aprs que le projecteur a t mis en marche
lorsque la touche (POWER) sur le botier du projecteur ou la touche POWER OFF sur la tlcommande est enfonce
Pour liminer le message, appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche du botier du projecteur ou de la tlcommande.
Pour remplacer la lampe :
Lampe optionnelle et outils ncessaires pour le remplacement :
Lampe de remplacement : NP13LP
Tournevis Phillips ou quivalent
F-10
2. Retirer le logement de lampe.
(1) Desserrez les trois vis fermant le compartiment de la lampe jusqu ce que le tournevis phillips tourne dans le
vide.
Les trois vis ne peuvent pas tre retires.
Il y a un verrouillage sur ce botier pour viter le risque dlectrocution. Nessayez pas de contourner ce ver-
rouillage.
(2) Retirer le botier de la lampe en le tenant.
1. Retirer le couvercle de la lampe.
(1) Dvisser la vis du couvercle de la lampe.
La vis du couvercle de la lampe ne peut pas tre retire.
(2) Appuyer sur le couvercle de la lampe et le faire glisser pour le retirer.
ATTENTION :
Vriez que le botier de la lampe est
sufsamment froid avant de le retirer.
Embotement
F-11
5. Connectez le cble dalimentation fourni et allumez le projecteur.
6. Enn, slectionner le menu [RESET] [EFFACER HEURES LAMPE] pour rinitialiser les heures duti-
lisation de la lampe.
REMARQUE : Si vous continuez utiliser le projecteur plus de 100 heures aprs que la lampe ait atteint sa n de vie, le projecteur
ne peut pas sallumer et le menu ne safche pas.
Si cela se produit, appuyez sur la touche HELP de la tlcommande pendant 10 secondes pour rinitialiser lhorloge de la lampe.
Lorsque lhorloge de dure de la lampe est rinitialise, le tmoin LAMP disparat.

4. Rexez le couvercle de la lampe.
(1) Faire glisser le couvercle de lampe dans lautre sens jusqu ce quil soit en place.
(2) Serrer la vis pour xer le couvercle de la lampe.
Assurez-vous de serrer la vis.
3. Installer un nouveau logement de lampe.
(1) Insrer un botier de lampe neuve dans la prise.
ATTENTION
Nutilisez pas dautre lampe que la lampe de remplacement NEC NP13LP.
Commandez-la chez votre revendeur NEC.
(2) Enfoncer le centre du haut du botier de la lampe an quil soit bien en place.
(3) Fixez-le laide des trois vis.
Assurez-vous de bien visser les deux vis.
Tenez le botier avec votre main pour lempcher de sincliner pendant que vous serrez la vis.
F-12
Depistage des pannes
Cette section facilite la rsolution des problmes pouvant tre rencontrs pendant linstallation ou lutilisation du projecteur.
Messages des voyants
Voyant dalimentation (POWER)
Condition du voyant Condition du projecteur Remarque
Arrt Le cble dalimentation est dbranch.
Voyant
clignotant
Vert 0,5 s Marche,
0,5 s Arrt
Le projecteur se prpare sallumer. Attendre un instant.
2,5 s Marche,
0,5 s Arrt
La Mise en sommeil est active.
Voyant sta-
tionnaire
Vert Le projecteur est allum.
Orange [NORMAL] est slectionn pour le [MODE
VEILLE]
Rouge [CONOMIE D'NERGIE] est slectionn pour le

[MODE VEILLE]

Voyant dtat (STATUS)
Arrt
Mode normal ou mode veille ([CONOMIE
DNERGIE] pour [MODE VEILLE])
Voyant
clignotant
Rouge 1 cycle (0,5 s
Marche, 2,5 s Arrt)
Problme du couvercle de la lampe ou problme
du botier de la lampe
Replacer correctement le couvercle de la lampe
ou le botier de la lampe.
2 cycles (0,5 s
Marche, 0,5 s Arrt)
Problme de temprature Le projecteur surchauffe. Dplacer le projecteur
dans un endroit plus frais.
4 cycles (0,5 s
Marche, 0,5 s Arrt)
Problme de ventilateur Les ventilateurs ne fonctionnement pas cor-
rectement.
6 cycles (0,5 s
Marche, 0,5 s Arrt)
Problme de lampe La lampe ne sallume pas. Attendre une bonne
minute, puis rallumer le projecteur.
Vert R-allumage de la lampe (Le projecteur est en
cours de refroidissement.)
Le projecteur se rallume.
Attendre un instant.
Voyant
station-
naire
Vert Veille ([NORMAL] pour [MODE VEILLE])
Orange Le VER. PANNEAU COMMANDE est activ. Vous avez appuy sur la touche du botier lor-
sque le verrouillage du panneau de commande
tait activ.
Erreur de CONTRLE ID L'ID de la tlcommande et l'ID du projecteur ne
correspondent pas.

Voyant de la lampe (LAMP)
Arrt Normal
Voyant
clignotant
Rouge La lampe a atteint la n de sa dure dutilisation. Le
message de remplacement de la lampe safche.
Remplacer la lampe.
Voyant sta-
tionnaire
Rouge La lampe a t utilise au-del de ses limites. Le
projecteur ne sallumera pas tant que la lampe
na pas t change.
Remplacer la lampe.
Vert Le [MODE CO] est rgl sur [ACTIV].
Protection contre la surchauffe
Si la temperature interne du projecteur devient trop elevee, le dispositif de protection contre la surchauffe eteint auto-
matiquement la lampe en faisant clignoter le voyant STATUS (2 cycles Marche et Arret.)
Si cette situation se produit, agissez de la facon suivante :
Debranchez le cable dalimentation apres que les ventilateurs de refroidissement se sont arretes.
Deplacez le projecteur vers un emplacement plus frais si la piece dans laquelle vous effectuez votre presentation
est particulierement chaude.
Nettoyez les ori ces daeration sils sont obstrues par la poussiere.
Attendez environ 60 minutes jusqua ce que linterieur du projecteur soit suf samment refroidi.
F-13
Problmes courants & Solutions ( POWER/STATUS/Voyant LAMP page F-12.)
(Les chiffres gurant dans le tableau font rfrence aux pages du mode demploi.)
Problme Vrier ces lments
Ne pas allumer Ou teindre Vrier que le cble dalimentation est branch et que la touche dalimentation du projecteur ou de la tlcommande est
active. ( pages 17 et 18)
Assurez-vous que le couvercle de la lampe est correctement install. ( page 72)
Vriez que le projecteur ne surchauffe pas. Si la ventilation est insufsante autour du projecteur ou si la pice est
particulirement chaude, dplacez le projecteur dans un endroit plus frais.
Vrier que le projecteur nest pas utilis encore 100 heures aprs que la lampe a atteint la n de sa dure de vie. Dans ce
cas, remplacer la lampe. Si cette dure est dpasse, remplacez la lampe. Aprs le remplacement de la lampe, rinitialisez
le compteur dheures. ( page 68)
La lampe peut ne pas sallumer. Attendre une minute entire, puis rallumer le projecteur.
Rglez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lors de lutilisation du projecteur des altitudes denviron 5500
pieds/1700 mtres ou plus. Utiliser le projecteur sans rgler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut causer une surchauffe et le
projecteur pourrait steindre. Si cela se produit, attendez quelques minutes et allumez le projecteur. ( page 61)
Si vous mettez le projecteur sous tension immdiatement aprs que la lampe soit teinte, le ventilateur fonctionne quelques
instants sans quaucune image ne safche, puis le projecteur afche limage. Attendre un instant.
Steint Assurez-vous que [MINUT. DSACTIVATION] ou [MARCHE AUTO DS] est dsactiv. ( page 63, 64)
Absence dimage Utiliser la touche COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2, VIDEO ou S-VIDEO de la tlcommande pour slectionner votre source
(Ordinateur, Vido ou S-Vido). ( page 20) Sil ny a toujours pas dimage, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche.
Sassurer que les cbles sont connects correctement.
Utiliser les menus pour ajuster la luminosit et le contraste. ( page 49)
Retirer le cache-objectif.
Rinitialiser les rglages ou ajustements aux niveaux des prrglages dusine laide de la [RESET] du menu. ( page
68)
Entrez votre mot-cl enregistr si la fonction Scurit est active. ( page 32)
Assurez-vous de connecter le projecteur et lordinateur portable pendant que le projecteur est en mode de veille et avant
dallumer lordinateur portable.
Dans la plupart des cas, le signal de sortie de lordinateur portable nest pas activ si ce dernier nest pas connect au
projecteur avant dtre allum.
* Si lcran devient vierge lors de lutilisation de la tlcommande, cela peut venir du logiciel conomiseur dcran ou de
gestion dnergie de lordinateur.
Voir galement la page suivante .
Limage devient subitement
sombre
Vrier si le projecteur est en mode ECO forc en raison dune temprature ambiante trop leve. Dans ce cas, abaisser
la temprature interne du projecteur en slectionnant [HAUT] pour [MODE VENTILATEUR]. ( page 61)
La couleur ou la teinte nest
pas normale
Vrier si une couleur approprie est slectionne dans [COULEUR MURALE]. Si oui, slectionner une option approprie.
( page 55)
Rgler [TEINTE] dans [IMAGE]. ( page 49)
Limage nest pas carre
lcran
Repositionner le projecteur pour amliorer langle par rapport lcran. ( page 21)
Utiliser la fonction Keystone pour corriger la distorsion trapzodale. ( page 24)
Limage est oue Ajuster la mise au point. ( page 23)
Repositionner le projecteur pour amliorer langle par rapport lcran. ( page 21)
Sassurer que la distance entre le projecteur et lcran est dans lintervalle de rglage de lobjectif. ( page 10)
Une condensation risque de se former sur lobjectif si le projecteur est froid, dplac dans un endroit chaud puis mis en
marche. Si cela se produit, ne pas toucher le projecteur et attendre quil ny ait plus de condensation sur lobjectif.
Une oscillation apparat
lcran
Rglez le [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur un autre mode que [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lors de lutilisation du projecteur des
altitudes moins importantes quenviron 5500 pieds/1700 mtres. Utiliser le projecteur des altitudes moins importantes
que 5500 pieds/1700 mtres et le rgler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut causer un refroidissement de la lampe, crant une
oscillation de limage. Commutez du mode [MODE VENTILATEUR] [AUTO]. ( page 61)
Limage dle verticalement,
horizontalement ou dans les
deux sens
Contrlez la rsolution et la frquence de lordinateur. Assurez-vous que la rsolution que vous tentez dafcher est
supporte par le projecteur. ( page 80)
Ajuster manuellement limage de lordinateur avec Horizontale/Verticale dans [OPTIONS DIMAGE]. ( page 52)
La tlcommande ne fonc-
tionne pas
Installer des piles neuves. ( page 8)
Sassurer quil ny a pas dobstacle entre vous et le projecteur.
Se mettre 7m du projecteur. ( page 8)
Assurez-vous que lID de la tlcommande corresponde celui du projecteur. ( page 60)
Le voyant est allum ou
clignote
Voir le voyant POWER/STATUS/LAMP. ( page 73)
Couleurs mlanges en mode
RGB
Appuyez sur la touche AUTO ADJ. du botier du projecteur ou de la tlcommande. ( page 26)
Rglez manuellement limage de lordinateur avec [HORLOGE]/[PHASE] dans [OPTIONS DIMAGE] dans le menu.
( page 51)
Lunit de contrle du rseau
local (LAN) ou celle du PC
nest pas active.
Assurez-vous que [BORNE DE CONTRLE] soit rgl correctement. ( page 64)
Impossible de contrler le
projecteur partir dun ap-
pareil externe
Vriez si [MODE VEILLE] est rgl sur [CONOMIE DNERGIE] et sil lest, essayez de le rgler sur [NORMAL]. (
page 63)
La photo 3D nest pas af-
che
Voir Dpistage des pannes concernant la visualisation des images 3D la page 42.
Pour plus dinformations, contacter votre vendeur.
F-14
Sil ny a pas dimage ou si limage ne safche pas correctement.
Procdure de mise en marche pour le projecteur et le PC.
Assurez-vous de connecter le projecteur et lordinateur portable pendant que le projecteur est en mode de veille
et avant dallumer lordinateur portable.
Dans la plupart des cas, le signal de sortie de lordinateur portable nest pas activ si ce dernier nest pas connect
au projecteur avant dtre allum.
REMARQUE : Vous pouvez vrier la frquence horizontale du signal actuel dans le menu du projecteur sous Informations.
Sil indique 0kHz, cela signie quaucun signal nest envoy par lordinateur. Voir page 67 (Mode demploi) ou aller ltape
suivante.
Activation de lafchage externe de lordinateur.
Lafchage dune image sur lcran du PC portable ne signie pas ncessairement quil envoie un signal vers le
projecteur. Lors de lutilisation dun PC portable, une combinaison de touches de fonction active/dsactive lafchage
externe. En gnral, la combinaison de la touche Fn avec lune des 12 touches de fonction permet lallumage
ou lextinction de lafchage externe. Par exemple, les ordinateurs portables NEC utilisent Fn + F3, tandis que les
ordinateurs portables Dell utilisent la combinaison de touches Fn + F8 pour alterner entre les slections dafchage
externe.
Envoi dun signal non-standard par lordinateur
Si le signal envoy par un ordinateur portable nest pas un standard industriel, limage projete peut ne pas
safcher correctement. Si cela se produit, dsactiver lcran LCD de lordinateur portable lorsque lafchage du
projecteur est en cours dutilisation. Chaque ordinateur portable a une faon diffrente de dsactiver/ractiver les
crans LCD locaux comme dcrit ltape prcdente. Se rfrer la documentation de votre ordinateur pour de
plus amples informations.
Limage afche est incorrecte lors de lutilisation dun Macintosh
Lors de lutilisation dun Macintosh avec le projecteur, rgler le commutateur DIP de ladaptateur Mac (non fourni
avec le projecteur) en fonction de votre rsolution. Aprs le rglage, redmarrer votre Macintosh pour que les
changements soient effectifs.
Pour le rglage des modes dafchage autres que ceux supports par votre Macintosh et le projecteur, Le change-
ment du commutateur DIP sur un adaptateur Mac peut faire sauter lgrement limage ou ne rien afcher. Si cela
se produit, rgler le commutateur DIP sur le mode xe 13, puis redmarrer votre Macintosh. Aprs cela, rtablir
les commutateur DIP sur un mode afchable, puis redmarrer nouveau votre Macintosh.
REMARQUE : Un cble Adaptateur Vido fabriqu par Apple Computer est ncessaire pour un PowerBook qui ne possde pas
de connecteur mini D-Sub 15 broches.
Reet sur un PowerBook
* Lorsque le projecteur est utilis avec un PowerBook Macintosh, la sortie ne peut pas tre rgle sur 1024 x 768
moins que reet soit dsactiv sur votre PowerBook. Se rfrer au mode demploi fourni avec votre ordinateur
Macintosh au sujet du reet.
Les dossiers ou les icnes sont cachs sur lcran du Macintosh
Les dossiers ou les icnes peuvent ne pas tre vus sur lcran. Si cela se produit, slectionner [View] [Arrange]
dans le menu Apple et arranger les icnes.
S-1
Utilizacin de los documentos de usuario suministrados
Los siguientes documentos del usuario se encuentran incluidos con el proyector.
Informacin importante
Lea primero la informacin importante. Esta cubre informacin referente a la seguridad del proyector, precauciones,
cambio de la lmpara y solucin de problemas.
Gua rpida de conguracin
La gua rpida de conguracin proporciona informacin sobre la conguracin inicial y el uso respecto a la co-
nexin de fuente, activacin de la alimentacin, seleccin de una fuente y otras instrucciones de funcionamiento
bsicas.
Manual del usuario en CD-ROM
El manual del usuario completo se suministra en el NEC Projector CD-ROM en formato PDF (Portable Document
Format) y proporciona informacin detallada sobre el producto y su utilizacin para el proyector NEC.
El manual est disponible en 11 idiomas (Ingls, Alemn, Francs, Italiano, Espaol, Portugus, Sueco, Ruso,
Coreano, Chino simplicado y Japons).
Para ver o imprimir los archivos con formato PDF utilice el programa Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Rea-
der.
NOTA: Los programas Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se pueden descargar en la pgina web de Adobe.
Visite http://www.adobe.com y obtenga la versin actual para su SO (sistema operativo).
Para ver el manual del usuario (PDF)
[Windows]
1. Coloque el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado en la unidad de CD-ROM de su ordenador personal.
2. Haga doble clic en el icono [Mi PC] en el escritorio de Windows.
3. Haga doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM [NECPJ].
4. Haga doble clic en [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se iniciara y le permitirn visualizar el men de Incio.
5. Haga clic en [Manual del usuario].
El men del ndice se visualizar.
6. Haga clic en el ttulo del captulo que desea visualizar.
[Macintosh]
1. Coloque el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado en la unidad de CD-ROM de si ordenador Macintosh.
2. Haga doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM [NECPJ] en el escritorio de Macintosh.
3. Haga doble clic en [start_menu.pdf].
Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se iniciar y le permitir visualizar el men de Inicio.
4. Haga clic en [Manual del usuario].
El men del ndice se visualizar.
5. Haga clic en el ttulo del captulo que desea visualizar.
Para copiar el manual del usuario (PDF) a su ordenador:
Es posible copiar en la unidad de disco duro de su ordenador los manuales de usuario que vienen en el NEC
Projector CD-ROM suministrado.
En el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado seleccione [manual] [Spanish] [NP216_index_S.pdf] y [NP216_
manual_S.pdf] y copie dichos archivos en la unidad de disco duro de su ordenador.
Consulte el manual del usuario (formato PDF)
en el CD-ROM suministrado para obtener
informacin detallada.
Espaol
S-2
Cul es le contenido de la caja?
Asegrese de que la caja contiene todos los elementos que aparecen en la lista. Si falta alguna pieza, pngase en
contacto con su distribuidor.
Conserve la caja y los materiales de embalaje originales por si tiene que transportar el proyector.
Proyector
Tapa de la lente
(24F45801)
Cable de alimentacin
(US: 7N080236)
(EU: 7N080022)
Cable de seal VGA
(7N520073)
Manual del usuario
(7N951472)
Slo para Norteamrica
Tarjeta de registro
Garanta limitada
Para clientes en Europa:
Tiene a su disposicin la Pliza de garanta
en nuestra pgina web:
Para Norte Amrica
Gua de instalacin rpida
(7N8N0731)
Informacin importante (7N8N0752)
Para otros pases que no sea Norte
Amrica
Gua de instalacin rpida
(7N8N0731 y 7N8N0741)
Informacin importante (7N8N0752
y 7N8N0762)
Mando a distancia
(7N900881)
Pilas (AAA 2)
S-3
Precauciones
Precaucin
Lea con cuidado este manual antes de utilizar el proyector NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 y tenga el
manual a mano para poder consultarlo ms adelante.
PRECAUCIN
Para desactivar la alimentacin asegrese de extraer el enchufe de la toma de red elctrica.
La toma de red debe estar lo ms cerca posible del equipo, y adems debe ser fcilmente accesible.
PRECAUCIN
PARA EVITAR DESCARGAS ELCTRICAS, NO ABRA LA CAJA.
EN EL INTERIOR HAY COMPONENTES CON ALTA TENSIN.
ACUDA A PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CUALIFICADO.
Este smbolo advierte al usuario de la presencia de tensin sin aislamiento dentro del equipo suciente
como para causar descargas elctricas. Por lo tanto, es peligroso realizar cualquier tipo de contacto con
cualquier pieza del interior del equipo.
Este smbolo alerta al usuario de la presencia de informacin importante concerniente al funcionamiento
y mantenimiento del equipo.
Debe leerse atentamente la informacin para evitar problemas.
ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVITAR FUEGO O DESCARGAS ELCTRICAS, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LA
LLUVIA NI A LA HUMEDAD.
NO UTILICE EL ENCHUFE DE ESTE EQUIPO CON UN CABLE ALARGADOR O EN UNA TOMA DE PARED A
MENOS QUE LOS CONTACTOS SE PUEDAN INSERTAR COMPLETAMENTE.
Cmo deshacerse del producto utilizado
La legislacin de la UE puesta en prctica en cada estado miembro requiere que los productos elctricos
y electrnicos que lleven la marca (izquierda) deben de deshacerse separadamente de la basura normal.
Esto incluye proyectores y sus accesorios elctricos o lmparas. Cuando se deshaga de tales productos,
siga los consejos de su autoridad local o pregunte en la tienda en la que adquiri el producto.
Despus de recoger los productos utilizados, se vuelven a utilizar y a reciclar de forma adecuada. Este
esfuerzo nos ayuda a reducir los deshechos as como los impactos negativos, tales como el que el mercurio
de las lmparas lleva a cabo en la salud humana y en el medioambiente, a un nivel mnimo.
La marca en los productos elctricos y electrnicos se aplica slo a los actuales estados miembros de
la Unin Europea.
S-4
Importante para su seguridad
Estas instrucciones de seguridad son para garantizar una larga vida de su proyector y para evitar incendios y des-
cargas elctricas. Lalas detenidamente y respete todas las advertencias.
Instalacin
No coloque el proyector en las siguientes condiciones:
- en una mesa con ruedas, soporte o mesa inestables.
- cerca de agua, baos o habitaciones hmedas.
- bajo la luz directa del sol, cerca de calefacciones o dispositivos que radien calor.
- en un entorno polvoriento, con humo o con vapor.
- sobre una hoja de papel o pao, alfombrillas o alfombras.
Si desea instalar el proyector en el techo:
- No intente instalar el proyector usted mismo.
- El proyector debe de ser instalado por tcnicos cualicados para asegurar un funcionamiento adecuado y reducir
el riesgo de lesiones corporales.
- Adems, el techo debe de ser lo sucientemente fuerte como para soportar el proyector y la instalacin debe
de realizarse de acuerdo con las normas de edicios locales.
- Por favor consulte a su distribuidor para mayor informacin.
ADVERTENCIA:
No cubra la lente con el protector de lente ni con ningn otro objeto similar mientras el proyector est encen-
dido. En caso contrario, el calor que emite la luz proyectada podra derretir el protector.
No site ningn objeto sensible al calor delante de la lente del proyector. En caso contrario, el calor que emite
la luz proyectada podra derretir el objeto.

Ponga el proyector en posicin horizontal
El ngulo de inclinacin del proyector no debe exceder de 10 grados. Tampoco se debe instalar el proyector de ninguna
forma diferente a la instalacin de sobremesa o techo, ya que de lo contrario la vida til de la lmpara puede
reducirse considerablemente.
10
S-5
Precauciones ante fuegos y descargas elctricas
Asegrese de que existe una ventilacin suciente que los ventiladores no presentan obstrucciones para evitar
la acumulacin de calor en el interior del proyector. Deje un mnimo de 4 pulgadas (10 cm) de espacio entre su
proyector y las paredes que lo rodean.
No intente tocar la salida de ventilacin de la parte delantera, ya que puede calentarse mientras permanezca en-
cendido el proyector e inmediatamente despus de apagarlo.

Evite que objetos extraos, como clips y trozos de papel, caigan sobre el proyector.
No intente recuperar ningn objeto que pueda haber cado en el proyector. No inserte ningn objeto metlico, como
un cable o un destornillador, en el proyector. Si algn objeto cayese en el interior de su proyector, desconctelo
inmediatamente y deje que un miembro del personal de servicio tcnico retire el objeto de su proyector.
No coloque ningn objeto su proyector.
No toque el enchufe de alimentacin durante una tormenta. De lo contrario, podria recibir una descarga elctrica
o podria producirse un incendio.
El proyector est diseado para funcionar con una fuente de alimentacin de 100 a 240 V de CA a 50/60 Hz. Ase-
grese de que su fuente de alimentacin cumple estos requisitos antes de utilizar el proyector.
No mire directamente a la lente mientras el proyector est encendido. Podra producir lesiones graves en sus
ojos.

Mantenga cualquier objeto similar a una lupa fuera de la trayectoria de la luz del proyector. La luz proyectada desde
la lente es extensiva, de modo que cualquier objeto anmalo que pueda redirigir la luz que sale de la lente puede
provocar resultados impredecibles, como fuego o lesiones en los ojos.
No site ningn objeto sensible al calor delante del ventilador.
En caso contrario, podra derretirse el objeto o se podra quemar las manos debido al calor que expulsa el ventila-
dor.
Manipule el cable de alimentacin con cuidado. Un cable de alimentacin daado o deshilachado puede causar
descargas elctricas o un incendio.
- No utilice ningn otro cable de alimentacin que el suministrado.
- No doble ni tire excesivamente del cable de alimentacin.
- No coloque el cable de alimentacin debajo del proyector o debajo de ningn objeto pesado.
- No cubra el cable de alimentacin con materiales blandos tales como alfombrillas.
- No caliente el cable de alimentacin.
- No manipule el cable de alimentacin con las manos mojadas.
Apague el proyector, desenchufe el cable de alimentacin y lleve el proyector a un servicio tecnico cuali - cado si
ocurren las siguientes condiciones:
- Cuando el cable de alimentacin o enchufe est daado o deshilachado.
- Si se ha derramado lquido dentro del proyector o si ha estado expuesto a la lluvia o al agua.
- Si el proyector no funciona de forma normal cuando siga las siguientes instrucciones descritas en el manual del
usuario.
- Si el proyector se ha cado o si se ha daado la caja.
- Si el proyector muestra un cambio en el rendimiento que indiquen que necesita servicio.
Desconecte el cable de alimentacin y dems cables antes de transportar el proyector.
Desactive el proyector y desenchufe el cable de alimentacin antes de limpiar la caja o reemplazar la lmpara.
Apague el proyector y desenchufe el cable de alimentacin si el proyector no se utilizara por un largo periodo de
tiempo.
Cuando utilice un cable LAN (slo para NP216/NP215):
Por seguridad, no realice la conexin del conector para cableado de dispositivos perifricos que pueda tener un
voltaje excesivo.
S-6
PRECAUCIN
No utilice la pata de inclinacin con otro propsito que no sea el originalmente establecido. El uso incorrecto,
como la utilizacin de la pata de inclinacin para transportar o colgar (en una pared o techo) el proyector pueden
daar el proyector.
No enve el estuche blando por servicios de entrega de paquetes o envos de carga. Es posible que el proyector
en el interior del estuche blando se dae.
Seleccione el modo de ventilador [ALTO] si utiliza el proyector de forma continuada durante ms de un da. (En
el men, seleccione [CONFIG.] [OPCIONES(1)] [MODO DE VENTILADOR] [ALTO]).
No desactive la alimentacin de CA durante 60 segundos despus de que se active la lmpara y mientras el
indicador POWER parpadea en verde. De lo contrario, la lmpara podra sufrir fallo prematuro.
Piezas del proyector podran llegar a calentarse temporalmente si se apaga el proyector con el botn POWER
o si desconecta el suministro de alimentacin CA durante la operacin del proyector de forma normal.
Tenga precaucin al recoger el proyector.
Precauciones con el mendo a distancia
Manipule el mando a distancia con cuidado.
Si se moja el mando a distancia, lmpielo y squelo inmediatamente.
Evite el calor y humedad excesivos.
No caliente, desarme ni arroje las pilas al fuego.
Cuando no vaya a usar el mando a distancia por un perodo prolongado de tiempo, retire las pilas.
Asegrese de que la polaridad (+/) de las pilas sea correcta.
No utilice pilas nuevas y usadas al mismo tiempo y no mezcle pilas de distinto tipo.
Deseche las pilas utilizadas segn las regulaciones locales.
Sustitucin de la lmpara
Use la lmpara especicada para garantizar la seguridad y el desempeo.
Para sustituir la lmpara, siga todas las instrucciones que aparecen en la pgina S-9.
Asegrese de reemplazar la lmpara cuando aparezca el mensaje [LA LMPARA HA LLEGADO AL TRMINO
DE SU VIDA TIL. REEMPLACE LA LMPARA.]. Si contina utilizando la lmpara despus de que sta haya
alcanzado el nal de su vida til, la bombilla de la lmpara podra estallar y las piezas de cristal podran esparcirse
por la caja de la lmpara. No toque los trozos de vidrio, pues podra cortarse.
Si esto sucediera, pngase en contacto con su distribuidor para el recambio de la lmpara.
Caractersticas de una lmpara
El proyector tiene una lmpara de mercurio de alta presin como fuente de luz.
La caracterstica de la lmpara es que el brillo va disminuyendo gradualmente con el paso del tiempo.
Tambin si se enciende y se apaga la lmpara con mucha frecuencia aumentar la posibilidad de que brille menos.
PRECAUCIN:
NO TOQUE LA LMPARA inmediatamente despus de que ha estado en uso; estar extremadamente caliente.
Apague el proyector y desconecte el cable de alimentacin. Permita que la lmpara se enfre durante al menos
una hora antes de manipularla.
Al retirar la lmpara de un proyector instalado en el techo, asegrese de que no se encuentre nadie debajo.
Fragmentos de cristal podran caerse si se ha quemado la lmpara.
S-7
Precauciones de salud para los usuarios al visualizar imgenes en 3D
Antes de la visualizacin, asegrese de leer los consejos de cuidado sanitario que se encuentran en el manual del
usuario incluido con sus gafas LCD de obturacin o con sus archivos compatibles de 3D como por ejemplo DVD,
video juegos, archivos de video de ordenador, etc.
Para evitar sntomas adversos, preste atencin a lo siguiente:
- No utilice las gafas LCD de obturacin para la visualizacin de materiales que no sean imgenes en 3D.
- Mantenga una distancia de 2 m o ms entre la pantalla y el usuario. Visualizar imgenes en 3D desde una distancia
demasiado corta puede daar sus ojos.
- Evite la visualizacin de imgenes en 3D durante prolongados perodos de tiempo. Tome un descanso de 15
minutos o ms despus de cada hora de visualizacin.
- Si usted o cualquier otro miembro de su familia tiene antecedentes de convulsiones por sensibilidad a la luz,
consulte a su mdico antes de ver imgenes en 3D.
- Mientras visualiza imgenes en 3D, si siente algn malestar como por ejemplo nusea, mareo, vrtigo, dolor de
cabeza, fatiga visual, visin nublosa, convulsiones, y entumecimiento, deje de verlas. Si los sntomas continan,
busque asistencia mdica.
Acerca del modo de altitud elevada
Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente
5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores.
Utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros sin ajustar en [ALTITUD ELEVADA]
puede causar que el proyector se sobre caliente y que el protector pueda apagar. Si esto sucede, espere un par
de minutos y encienda el proyector.
Utilizar el proyector en altitudes inferiores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros o menores y ajustando en
[ALTITUD ELEVADA] puede causar que la lmpara se sobre enfre, provocando que la imagen se mueva rpido.
Cambie [MODO DE VENTILADOR] a [AUTO].
Utilizar el proyector en altitudes aproximadamente de 5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores puede acortar la vida de
los componentes pticos como por ejemplo la lmpara.
Sobre los derechos de reproduccin de las imgenes originales proyectadas:
No olvide que la utilizacin de este proyector para nes comerciales lucrativos o para atraer la atencin del pblico
en lugares como cafeteras u hoteles, y el empleo de la compresin o la expansin de la imagen en pantalla con las
subsiguientes funciones, podra originar problemas por la violacin de los derechos de reproduccin protegidos por
la ley de propiedad intelectual.
[RELACIN DE ASPECTO], [KEYSTONE], Funcin de aumento y otras funciones similares.
S-8
Limpieza de la cubierta y de la lente
1. Apague el proyector antes de limpiarlo.
2. Limpie la cubierta peridicamente con un pao hmedo. Si est muy sucia, utilice un detergente suave.
No utilice nunca detergentes o disolventes fuertes tales como alcohol o diluyente.
Utilice una aspiradora para limpiar
la entrada de ventilacin de la caja.
Nota sobre limpieza de lentes
Utilice un pincel soplador o papel ptico para limpiar la lente, y procure no rayar ni estropear la lente.
S-9
Reemplazo de la lmpara
Cuando la duracin de la lmpara haya llegado a su n, el indicador LAMP de la cubierta parpadear en rojo. Aunque la
lmpara contine funcionando, sustityala para que el proyector siga presentando un rendimiento ptimo. Despus de
reemplazar la lmpara, asegrese de borrar el contador de hora de lmpara. ( pgina 68 (Manual del usuario))
PRECAUCIN
Use la lmpara especicada para garantizar la seguridad y el desempeo.
NO TOQUE LA LMPARA inmediatamente despus de que haya estado en uso. La lmpara estar extremada-
mente caliente. Primero apague el proyector, y despus desenchufe el cable de alimentacin. Antes de manipular
la lmpara espere por lo menos una hora hasta que se enfre.
NO QUITE NINGN TORNILLO, excepto el tornillo de la cubierta de la lmpara y tres tornillos de la caja de la
lmpara. De lo contrario, podra recibir una descarga elctrica.
No rompa el cristal del bastidor de la lmpara.
Asegrese de no dejar huellas digitales en la supercie de cristal del bastidor de la lmpara. La presencia de
huellas digitales en la supercie de cristal puede causar sombras no deseadas y mala calidad de imagen.
El proyector se apagar y pasar al modo de espera si sigue utilizndolo durante 100 horas ms una vez que la dura-
cin de la lmpara haya llegado a su n. Si esto sucediera, asegrese de reemplazar la lmpara. Si se produce esta
situacin, asegrese de sustituir la lmpara. Si sigue utilizando la lmpara una vez que su duracin haya llegado a
su n, es posible que la bombilla se rompa y los trozos de cristal se dispersen en el compartimento de la lmpara. No
toque los trozos de vidrio, pues podra cortarse. Si esto sucediera, pngase en contacto con su distribuidor NEC para
el recambio de la lmpara.
* NOTA: Este mensaje aparecer bajo las siguientes condiciones:
un minuto despus de que el proyector se ha encendido
cuando se pulsa el botn (POWER) en la cabina del proyector o se pulsa el botn POWER OFF en el mando a distancia
Para eliminar este mensaje, pulse cualquier botn en la cabina del proyector o en el mando a distancia.
Para reemplazar la lmpara:
Lmpara opcional y herramientas necesarias para el reemplazo:
Lmpara de repuesto: NP13LP
Destornillador Phillips o equivalente
S-10
2. Quite la cubierta de la lmpara.
(1) Aoje los tres tornillos que aseguran la caja de la lmpara hasta que el destornillador Phillips gire libremente.
Los tres tornillos no se pueden quitar.
El alojamiento posee un seguro para evitar el riesgo de descargas elctricas. No intente franquear este seguro.
(2) Extraiga la cubierta de la lmpara sujetndola.
1. Quite la tapa de la lmpara.
(1) Aoje el tornillo de la cubierta de la lmpara.
El tornillo de la cubierta de la lmpara no se puede sacar.
(2) Empuje y deslice la cubierta de la lmpara.
PRECAUCIN:
Asegrese de que el alojamiento de la
lmpara se encuentra a baja temperatura
antes de sacarlo.
nter bloqueo
S-11
5. Conecte el cable de alimentacin suministrado y encienda el proyector.
6. Finalmente, seleccione el men [REAJ.] [BORRAR HORAS DE LA LMPARA] para borrar las horas
de uso de la lmpara.
NOTA: Si sigue utilizando el proyector durante 100 horas ms una vez que la duracin de la lmpara haya llegado a su n, el proyector
no se podr encender ni se mostrar el men.
Si esto sucediera, pulse el botn HELP en el mando a distancia durante 10 segundos para reajustar el reloj de la lmpara a cero.
Cuando el reloj de tiempo de uso de la lmpara se ajusta a cero, el indicador LAMP se apaga.

4. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la lmpara.
(1) Deslice la tapa de la lmpara hasta que encaje en posicin.
(2) Apriete el tornillo para cerrar la cubierta de la lmpara.
Asegrese de apretar bien el tornillo.
3. Instale una nueva cubierta de la lmpara.
(1) Introduzca un nuevo bastidor de lmpara hasta que el bastidor de lmpara est introducido en la toma.
PRECAUCIN
Utilice solamente la lmpara de repuesto NEC NP13LP.
Haga su pedido a su distribuidor NEC.
(2) Empuje en el centro superior del alojamiento de la lmpara para que quede jo.
(3) Fjelo en su sitio con los tres tornillos.
Asegrese de apretar los dos tornillos.
Agarre la carcasa con su mano para evitar se vuelque mientras aprieta el tornillo.
S-12
Deteccin de fallos
Esta seccin le ayuda a resolver eventuales problemas que puede tener al ajustar o utilizar el proyector.
Mensajes de los indicadores
Indicador de alimentacin (POWER)
Condicin del indicador Condicin del proyector Nota
Apagado El cable de alimentacin esta desenchufado.
Luz intermi-
tente
Verde 0,5 seg. Encendido,
0,5 seg. Apagado
El proyector se est preparando para en-
cenderse.
Espere unos instantes.
2,5 seg. Encendido,
0,5 seg. Apagado
El temporizador de desconexin est
activado.

Luz ja Verde El proyector se est enfriando.
Naranja Se selecciona [NORMAL] para [MODO DE
ESPERA]
Rojo Se selecciona [AHORRO DE ENERGA] para

[MODO DE ESPERA]

Indicador de estado (STATUS)
Apagado
Normal o Modo de espera ([AHORRO DE
ENERGA] para [MODO DE ESPERA])
Luz intermi-
tente
Rojo 1 ciclo (0,5 seg. Encendi-
do, 2,5 seg. Apagado)
Error en la cubierta de la lmpara o error en
el bastidor de la lmpara
Reemplace correctamente la cubierta de la
lmpara o el bastidor de la lmpara.
2 ciclo (0,5 seg. Encendi-
Error de temperatura El proyector se ha recalentado. Traslade el
proyector a un lugar ms fresco.
4 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendi-
Error de ventilador Los ventiladores no funcionan correcta-
mente.
6 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendi-
Error de la lmpara La lmpara no se enciende. Espere un minuto
completo y luego vuelva a encenderla.
Verde Reencendido de la lmpara (El proyector se
est enfriando.)
El proyector se vuelve a encender. Espere
unos instantes.
Luz ja Verde Modo de espera ([NORMAL] para [MODO
DE ESPERA])
Naranja La funcin [BLOQ. PANEL DE CONT.] est

activada.
Ha pulsado un botn del proyector con la funcin
Bloqueo del panel de control activada.
Error de ID DE CONTROL El ID del mando a distancia no coincide con el
ID del proyector.

Indicador de lmpara (LAMP)
Apagado Normal
Luz intermi-
tente
Rojo La lmpara ha llegado al trmino de su vida til. Se
visualiza el mensaje de reemplazo de la lmpara.
Reemplace la lmpara.
Luz ja Rojo Se ha sobrepasado el lmite de uso de la
lmpara. El proyector no se encender hasta
que la lmpara sea reemplazada.
Reemplace la lmpara.
Verde La [MODO ECO] se encuentra en el [ACT.].
Proteccin contra sobretemperatura
Si la temperatura en el interior del proyector aumenta excesivamente, el dispositivo de proteccin contra sobretemperatura
apagar automticamente la lmpara y el indicador STATUS comenzar a parpadear (2 ciclos de Encendido y Apagado.)
Si esto sucediera, haga lo siguiente:
Desenchufe el cable de alimentacin una vez que los ventiladores de enfriamiento se hayan detenido.
Traslade el proyector a un lugar ms fresco si la habitacin en que se encuentra es excesivamente calurosa.
Limpie los ori cios de ventilacin si estn obstruidos con polvo.
Espere aproximadamente 60 minutos hasta que el interior del proyector se enfre.
S-13
Problemas comunes y sus soluciones ( Indicador de alimentacin/estado/lmpara en la pgina S-12.)
(Los nmeros en la tabla se reeren a los nmeros de las pginas en el manual del usuario.)
Problema Compruebe los siguientes puntos
No encienda O apague Compruebe que el cable de alimentacin est conectado y que el botn de alimentacin del proyector o del mando a distancia est
activado. ( pginas 17, 18)
Asegrese de que la cubierta de la lmpara est instalada correctamente. ( pgina 72)
Compruebe para ver si el proyector se ha sobrecalentado. Si no hay suciente ventilacin alrededor del proyector o si la habitacin
donde se lleva a cabo la presentacin es particularmente calurosa, lleve el proyector a un lugar ms fresco.
Compruebe si puede seguir utilizando el proyector durante 100 horas ms una vez que la duracin de la lmpara haya llegado a su
n. En tal caso, reemplace la lmpara. Despus de reemplazar la lmpara, reajuste las horas de lmpara utilizadas. ( pgina 68)
La lmpara puede no encenderse. Espere un minuto completo y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacin.
Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700
metros o mayores. Utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores sin ajustar en [ALTI-
TUD ELEVADA] puede causar que el proyector se sobre caliente y que el protector pueda apagar. Si esto sucede, espere un par de
minutos y encienda el proyector. ( pgina 61)
Si enciende el proyector inmediatamente despus de que se apague la lmpara, los ventiladores funcionarn sin visualizar una
imagen durante un tiempo y luego el proyector mostrar la imagen. Espere unos instantes.
El proyector se apaga Asegrese de que las funciones [TEMPOR. DESACTIVADO] y [ENC. AUTO. DESACT.] estn deshabilitadas. ( pgina 63, 64)
No hay imagen Utilice el botn COMPUTER1, VIDEO o S-VIDEO del mando a distancia para seleccionar la fuente (Ordenador, Vdeo o S-Vdeo).
( pgina 20) Si todava no aparece ninguna imagen, pulse nuevamente el botn.
Asegrese de que los cables estn conectados correctamente.
Use los mens para ajustar el brillo y el contraste. ( pgina 49)
Quite la tapa de la lente.
Restablezca los ajustes y conguraciones a los valores preajustados de fbrica seleccionando la opcin [REAJ.] del men. (
pgina 68)
Si la funcin de seguridad est habilitada, introduzca la palabra clave registrada. ( pgina 32)
Asegrese de conectar el proyector y el PC porttil mientras que el proyector se encuentre en el modo de espera y antes de activar
la alimentacin al PC porttil.
En la mayora de los casos la seal de salida del PC porttil no se activa a menos que est conectado al proyector antes de ser
activado.
* Si la pantalla queda en blanco mientras usa el mando a distancia, es probable que se deba a la accin del protector de pantalla
o a la funcin de ahorro de energa del ordenador.
Consulte tambin la pgina siguiente.
La imagen repentinamente
se vuelve oscura
Compruebe si el proyector se encuentra en modo ECO forzoso debido a que la temperatura ambiente es demasiado alta.
Si es as, reduzca la temperatura interna del proyector seleccionando la opcin [ALTO] para el [MODO DE VENTILADOR].
( pgina 61)
La tonalidad o el tinte de los
colores no es normal
Compruebe si se ha seleccionado un color apropiado en [COLOR DE PARED]. Si no es as, seleccione una opcin apropiada. (
pgina 55)
Ajuste la opcin [TINTE] en [AJUSTE DE LA IMAGEN]. ( pgina 49)
La imagen no aparece
rectangular en la pantalla
Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ngulo de ste respecto de la pantalla. ( pgina 21)
Use la funcin Keystone para corregir la distorsin trapezoidal. ( pgina 24)
La imagen se ve borrosa Ajuste el enfoque. ( pgina 23)
Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ngulo de ste respecto de la pantalla. ( pgina 21)
Asegrese de que la distancia entre el proyector y la pantalla est dentro del margen de ajuste de la lente. ( pgina 10)
Si se enciende el proyector luego de trasladarlo desde un lugar fro a uno caluroso, puede producirse condensacin en la lente. Si
esto sucediera, deje el proyector reposar hasta que ya no haya condensacin en la lente.
Movimiento rpido en la
pantalla
Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en cualquier otro modo que no sea [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes infe-
riores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros. Utilizar el proyector en altitudes inferiores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700
metros y ajustando en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] puede causar que la lmpara se sobre enfre, provocando que la imagen se mueva
rpido. Cambie [MODO DE VENTILADOR] a [AUTO]. ( pgina 61)
La imagen se desplaza verti-
calmente, horizontalmente o
en ambas direcciones
Compruebe la resolucin y la frecuencia del ordenador. Asegrese de que la resolucin que est intentando visualizar sea compatible
con el proyector. ( pgina 80)
Ajuste la imagen del ordenador manualmente utilizando la opcin Horizontal/Vertical de [OPCIONES DE IMAGEN].
( pgina 52)
El mando a distancia no
funciona
Instale pilas nuevas. ( pgina 8)
Compruebe que no hay obstculos entre usted y el proyector.
Prese a una distancia de mximo 22 pies (7 m) del proyector. ( pgina 8)
Asegrese de que el ID del mando a distancia coincide con el ID del proyector. ( pgina 60)
El indicador est encendido
o parpadea
Vea el indicador de POWER/STATUS/LAMP. ( pgina 73)
Los colores se mezclan en
el modo RGB
Pulse el botn AUTO ADJ. en el proyector o en el mando a distancia. ( pgina 26)
Ajuste la imagen del ordenador de forma manual a travs de las opciones [RELOJ]/[FASE] en las [OPCIONES DE IMAGEN] del
men. ( pgina 51)
El control de LAN no est
activado o el control de PC
no est activado
Asegrese de que [TERMINAL CONTROL] est ajustado correctamente. ( pgina 64)
No puede controlar el proyec-
tor desde un equipo externo
Compruebe si [MODO DE ESPERA] est ajustado en [AHORRO DE ENERGA] y si es el caso intente ajustarlo en [NORMAL]. (
pgina 63)
La imagen en 3D no es
visualizada
Consulte "Deteccin de fallos al visualizar imgenes en 3D " en la pgina 42.
Si desea mayor informacin, pngase en contacto con su distribuidor.
S-14
Si no hay imagen o si la imagen no se visualiza correctamente.
Proceso de conexin de la alimentacin para el proyector y el PC.
Asegrese de conectar el proyector y el PC porttil mientras que el proyector se encuentre en el modo de espera
y antes de activar la alimentacin al PC porttil.
En la mayora de los casos la seal de salida del PC porttil no se activa a menos que est conectado al proyector
antes de ser activado.
NOTA: Puede comprobar la frecuencia horizontal de la seal actual en el men del proyector, bajo la opcin Informacin. Si la
lectura de frecuencia es 0kHz, signicar que el ordenador no est emitiendo ninguna seal. Consulte la pgina 67 (Manual
del usuario) o vaya al paso siguiente.
Habilitacin del modo de visualizacin externa en el ordenador
La visualizacin de una imagen en la pantalla del PC porttil no signica necesariamente que el ordenador est
enviando una seal al proyector. Al utilizar un ordenador porttil compatible con PC, el modo de visualizacin ex-
terna puede habilitarse/inhabilitarse con una combinacin de teclas de funcin. Generalmente, la pulsacin de la
tecla Fn junto con una de las 12 teclas de funcin permite activar o desactivar el modo de visualizacin externa.
Por ejemplo, en los ordenadores porttiles NEC se utiliza la combinacin de teclas Fn + F3 (en los ordenadores
porttiles Dell se utiliza Fn + F8) para alternar entre las opciones de visualizacin externa.
Emisin de una seal no estndar desde el ordenador
Si la seal de salida de un PC porttil no cumple con las normas de la industria, la imagen proyectada no se
visualizar correctamente. Si esto sucediera, desactive la pantalla LCD del PC porttil cuando utilice el proyector.
La forma de desactivar/activar la pantalla LCD vara en cada PC porttil (segn se describi en el paso anterior).
Para obtener informacin detallada, consulte la documentacin suministrada con el ordenador.
Se visualiza una imagen incorrecta al utilizar un ordenador Macintosh
Si utiliza un ordenador Macintosh con el proyector, ajuste el interruptor DIP del adaptador Mac (no suministrado
con el proyector) de acuerdo con la resolucin del ordenador. Despus de realizar el ajuste, reinicie el ordenador
Macintosh para que los cambios se hagan efectivos.
Si se selecciona un modo de visualizacin distinto de los admitidos por el ordenador Macintosh y el proyector y se
cambia la posicin del interruptor DIP del adaptador Mac, podr producirse una ligera inestabilidad en la imagen
o sta podr no visualizarse. Si esto sucediera, ajuste el interruptor DIP al modo jo de 13 y reinicie el ordena-
dor Macintosh. Luego, ajuste los interruptores DIP a un modo que permita la visualizacin y vuelva a reiniciar el
ordenador Macintosh.
NOTA: En el caso de un ordenador PowerBook que no tiene un conector mini D-Sub de 15 contactos, se necesita un cable
adaptador de vdeo fabricado por Apple Computer.
Funcin espejo en un ordenador PowerBook
* Al utilizar el proyector con un ordenador PowerBook de Macintosh, es posible que la salida no se ajuste a 1024
x 768 a menos que la opcin espejo est desactivada en el ordenador PowerBook. Para ms detalles sobre
la funcin espejo, consulte el manual de uso suministrado con el ordenador Macintosh.
Las carpetas o iconos estn ocultos en la pantalla del ordenador Macintosh
Las carpetas o iconos pueden no visualizarse en la pantalla. Si esto sucediera, seleccione [View] [Arrange] en
el men Apple y organice los iconos.
Troubleshooting Check List
Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by
referring to the Troubleshooting section in your users manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem
more efciently.
Voir pages 82 et 83 (Mode demploi)
Consulte la pgina 82 y 83 (Manual del usuario)
No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector.
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the
PC rst, then start the PC.
Enabling your notebook PCs signal output to the projector.
A combination of function keys will enable/disable the
external display. Usually, the combination of the Fn key
along with one of the 12 function keys turns the external
display on or off.
No image (blue or black background, no display).
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJ.
button.
Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projectors menu.
Signal cables plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen.
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available.
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast.
projector.
Frequency of occurrence always sometimes (How often?_____________________) other (__________________)
Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also
Status Indicator (STATUS).
Lamp cover is installed correctly.
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement.
No power even though you press and hold the POWER but-
ton for 1 second.
Shut down during operation.
Lamp cover is installed correctly .
[AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the
[AUTO POWER OFF] function).
[OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF
TIMER] function).
Video and Audio
Image is too dark.
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast.
Image is distorted.
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though
you carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment).
Parts of the image are lost.
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ.
button.
projectors menu.
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.
Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal.
projector.
Some pixels are lost.
Image is ickering.
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ.
button.
projectors menu.
Image shows ickering or color drift on a computer signal.
Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from
[HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO].
Image appears blurry or out of focus.
Still unchanged even though you checked the signals resolu-
tion on PC and changed it to projectors native resolution.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
No sound.
Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level.
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only
models with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Other
Remote control does not work.
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the
remote control.
Projector is placed near a uorescent light that can disturb
the infrared remote controls.
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with
the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in
the menu.
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT
button for a minimum of 10 seconds.
Ver.3 04/10 (S)
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Projector
Model number:
Serial No.:
Date of purchase:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Eco Mode: Off On
Information on input signal:
Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHz
Vertical synch frequency [ ] Hz
Synch polarity H (+) ()
V (+) ()
Synch type Separate Composite
Sync on Green
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light Orange Green
Flashing light [ ] cycles
Remote control model number:
Signal cable
NEC standard or other manufacturers cable?
Model number: Length: inch/m
Distribution amplier
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
Projector
PC
DVD player
Installation environment
Screen size: inch
Screen type: White matte Beads Polarization
Wide angle High contrast
Throw distance: feet/inch/m
Orientation: Ceiling mount Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Connected directly to wall outlet
Connected to power cord extender or other (the
number of connected equipment______________)
Connected to a power cord reel or other (the num-
ber of connected equipment______________)
Computer
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Notebook PC / Desktop
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Other:
Video equipment
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
Manufacturer:
Model number:
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
U.S.Responsible Party: NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc.
Address: 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100
Itasca, Illinois 60143
Tel. No.: 1-800-NEC-INFO
Type of Product: Projector
Equipment Classication: Class B Peripheral
Model: NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110
We hereby declare that the equipment specied above conforms to the technical standards as
specied in the FCC Rules.
Printed in China
7N8N0752
NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010
In Europe
NEC Display Solutions Europe GmbH
Address: Landshuter Allee 12-14
D-80637 Mnchen, Germany
Telephone: +49 89 99699 0
Email: infomail@nec-displays.com
In North America
NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc.
Address: 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100 Itasca,
Illinois
60143, U.S.A.
Telephone: +1 800 836 0655
In Oceania
Australia
AWA Limited.
Address: 151 Arthur Street
Homebush West NSW 2140 Australia
Customer Call Centre
Email Address: commercialsupport@awa.com.au
For Travel Care service, while customer is in Australia,
the customer will contact AWA on 1300366144, select
Option 4. If you want to book warranty service by email
customer goes to:
commercialsupport@awa.com.au.
New Zealand
Visual Group Ltd.
Address: 28 Walls Road Penrose Auckland New Zea-
land
Email Address: sarah.reed@visualgroup.co.nz
In Asia
NEC Display Solutions, Ltd.
Address: 686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun,
Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan
Telephone: +81 465 85 2369
NEC Solutions (China) Co.,Ltd.
Address: Rm 1903, Shining Building,35 Xueyuan Rd,
Haidian District Beijing 100083, P.R.C.
Telephone: +8610 82317788
NEC Hong Kong Ltd.
Address: 25/F.,The Metropolis Tower,10 Metropolis
Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Telephone: +852 2369 0335
NEC Taiwan Ltd.
Address: 7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Telephone: +886 2 8500 1700
NEC Asia Pte. Ltd.
Address: 401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par
Technocentre, Singapore 149598
Telephone: +65 6 273 8333
NEC Corporation of Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
Address: 33rd Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P.
Ramlee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Telephone: +6 03 2178 3600 (ISDN)
N
P
2
1
6
/
N
P
2
1
5
/
N
P
2
1
0
/
N
P
1
1
5
/
N
P
1
1
0

P
o
r
t
a
b
l
e

P
r
o
j
e
c
t
o
r

I
m
p
o
r
t
a
n
t

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Quick Setup Guide
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Quick Setup Guide
Connect your computer to the projector.
Schlieen Sie ihren Computer an den
Projektor an.
Connecter lordinateur au projecteur.
Collegate il vostro computer al
proiettore.
Conectar el ordenador al proyector.
Ligue o seu computador ao projector.
Anslut din dator till projektorn.
.
.
COMPUTER IN COMPUTER 1 IN
VGA signal cable (supplied)
VGA-Signalkabel (Lieferumfang)
Cble de signal VGA (fourni)
Cavo dei segnali VGA (in dotazione)
Cable de seal VGA (suministrado)
Cabo do sinal VGA (fornecido)
VGA-signalkabel (medfljer)
VGA ( )
VGA ( )
Connect the supplied power cable.
Schlieen Sie das mitgelieferte Netzkabel an.
Connecter le cble d'alimentation fourni.
Collegate il cavo d'alimentazione in dotazione.
Conecte el cable de alimentacin suministrado.
Ligue o cabo da alimentao fornecido.
Anslut den medlevererade ntkabeln.
,
.
.
NP216 NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Select a source.
Auswhlen einer Quelle.
Slectionner une source.
Selezione di una fonte.
Seleccin de una fuente.
Escolha uma fonte.
Vlja en klla.
.
.
Turn on the projector.
Schalten Sie den Projektor ein.
Allumer le projecteur.
Accensione del proiettore.
Encienda el proyector.
Ligue o projector.
Sl p strmmen till projektorn.
.
.
Nehmen Sie die Linsenkappe ab.
Retirer le cache-objectif.
Rimuovete il copriobiettivo.
Quite la tapa de la lente.
Retire a tampa da lente.
Ta bort linsskyddet.
.
.
Fn F1 F12
( page 12, 75 of the Users Manual)
TIP:
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer
image automatically.
TIPP:
Tast AUTO ADJ. bettigen, um das Computerbild
automatisch einzustellen.
ASTUCE:
Appuyez sur la touche AUTO ADJ pour optimiser une
image dordinateur automatiquement.
SUGGERIMENTO:
Premete il tasto AUTO ADJ. per ottimizzare automaticamente limmagine del computer.
SUGERENCIA:
Pulse el botn AUTO ADJ. para optimizar automticamente una imagen de ordenador.
DICA:
Prima o boto AUTO ADJ. para optimizar automaticamente uma imagem do computador.
TIPS:
Tryck p AUTO ADJ.-tangenten fr att optimera en datorbild automatiskt.
:
AUTO ADJ.
:
(AUTO ADJ.) .
Adjust the tilt foot

Einstellung des Kippfues
Rgler le pied de rglage de linclinaison
Regolate il piedino dinclinazione
Ajuste de las patas de inclinacin
Ajuste o P de Inclinao
Justera lutningen med foten

.
( Page 22 of the Users Manual)
Rear foot
Hinterer Fu
Pied arrire
Piedino posteriore
Pata posterior
P traseiro
Bakre fot

Up
Nach oben
Haut
Su
Arriba
Cima
Upp
Down
Nach Unten
Bas
Gi
Abajo
Baixo
Ner
Adjust the picture size and position.

Einstellung der Bildgre und Bildposition.
Ajuster la taille et de la position de limage.
Regolate delle dimensioni e della
posizione dellimmagine.
Ajuste del tamao y la posicin de la imagen.
Ajuste o tamanho da imagem e a posio.
Justera bildstorlek och position.
.
.
Einstellbarer Kippfuhebel
Levier de pied inclinaison rglable
Leva piedino di regolazione
Palanca de la pata de inclinacin ajustable
Alavanca ajustvel do p de inclinao
Justerbar spak fr justerfot

Lftungsschlitze (Auslass)
Ventilation (sortie)
Ventilazione (uscita)
Ventilacin (salida)
Ventilao (sada)
Ventilation (utlopp)

( )
2
1
Einstellbarer Kippfu
Pied inclinaison rglable
Piedino di inclinazione regolabile
Pata de inclinacin ajustable
P de inclinao ajustvel
Justerfot

3
Zoom
Focus
Fokus
Mise au point optique
Fuoco
Enfoque
Focagem
Fokus
( page 23 of the Users Manual)

Correcting Keystone Distortion [KEYSTONE]
Korrigieren der Trapezverzerrung [TRAPEZ]
Correction de la dformation trapzodale [KEYSTONE]
Correzione della deformazione trapezoidale [TRAPEZIO]
Correccin de la distorsin trapezoidal [KEYSTONE]
Corrigir a Distoro do Trapezide [TRAPEZIDE]
Korrigera den keystonedistorsionen [KEYSTONE]
[ ]
[ ]
7N8N0731
Printed in China
Ver. 2 02/10 (S)
Turn off the projector.
Schalten Sie den Projektor aus.
Eteignez le projecteur.
Spegnete il proiettore.
Desactive el proyector.
Desligue o projector.
Stng av projektorn.
.
.
Unplug the power cable.
Trennen Sie das Netzkabel ab.
Dconnectez le cble dalimentation.
Scollegate il cavo di alimentazione.
Desenchufe el cable de alimentacin.
Desligue o cabo da alimentao.
Dra ut ntkabeln.
.
.
( page 27 of the User's Manual)
1
2
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Quick Setup Guide
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Quick Setup Guide
COMPUTER IN COMPUTER 1 IN
NP216 NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Connect your computer to the projector.

Pipojte pota k projektoru.
Slut computeren til projektoren.
.
Kytke tietokone projektoriin.
Csatlakoztassa a szmtgpet a projektorhoz.
Sluit uw computer aan op de projector.
Koble datamaskinen til projektoren.
Podcz komputer do projektora.
Bilgisayarnz projektre balayn.
VGA signal cable (supplied)

Signln kabel VGA (dodan)
VGA-kabel (medflger)
VGA ()
VGA-signaalikaapeli (vakiovaruste)
VGA jelkbel (tartozk)
VGA-signaalkabel (meegeleverd)
VGA-signalkabel (inkludert)
Przewd sygnaowy VGA (w zestawie)
VGA sinyal kablosu (salanmtr)
Connect the supplied power cable.
Pipojte dodan napjec kabel.
Tilslut det medflgende strmkabel.
.
Kytke mukana toimitettu virtajohto.
Csatlakoztassa a mellkelt tpkbelt.
De meegeleverde voedingskabel aansluiten.
Koble til strmkabelen som flger med.
Podcz dostarczony przewd zasilajcy.
Salanan g kablosunu takn.
Sejmte krytku objektivu.
Fjern objektivdkslet.
.
Poista linssinsuojus.
Vegye le a lencsevd kupakot.
Verwijder de lenskap.
Ta av linsedekselet.
Zdejmij oson obiektywu.
Lens kapan kartn.
Turn on the projector.

Zapnte projektor.
Tnd projektoren.
.
Kytke projektoriin virta.
Kapcsolja be a projektort.
Schakel de projector in.
Sl projektoren p.
Wcz projektor.
Projektr an.
Select a source.

Vyberte zdroj.
Vlg en kilde.
.
Valitse lhde.
Vlasszon ki egy forrst.
Selecteer een bron.
Velg en signalkilde.
Wybierz rdo sygnau.
Bir kaynak sein.
(! page 12, 75 of the Users Manual)
Fn F1 F12
TIP:
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer
image automatically.
TIP:
Stisknutm tlatka AUTO ADJ. (Automatick sezen)
automaticky optimalizujte obraz potae.
TIP:
Tryk p knappen AUTO ADJ. for at optimere computerens billede automatisk.
:
AUTO ADJ. ( ) .
VINKKI:
Voit optimoida tietokoneen kuvan automaattisesti AUTO ADJ. -painikkeella.
TIPP:
Nyomja meg az AUTO ADJ. gombot a szmtgp kpnek automatikus optimalizlshoz.
TIP:
Druk op de knop AUTO ADJ. om een computerbeeld automatisch te optimaliseren.
TIPS:
Trykk p AUTO ADJ.-knappen for optimalisere et datamaskinbilde automatisk.
WSKAZWKA:
Nacinij przycisk AUTO ADJ. (Automatyczne dostosowanie), aby automatyzcznie zoptymalizowa obraz z komputera.
PUCU:
Bilgisayar grntsn otomatik olarak optimize etmek iin AUTO ADJ. (OTOMATK AYAR) dmesine basn.
2
1
3
Adjust the picture size and position.
Upravte velikost a polohu obrazu.
Juster billedets strrelse og position.
.
Sd kuvan kokoa ja sijantia.
lltsa be a kp mrett s helyzett.
Het beeldformaat en de positie van het beeld
aanpassen.
Still inn bildestrrelsen og plasseringen.
Wyreguluj wielkoc obrazu i jego pooenie.
Resim boyutunu ve pozisyonunu ayarlayn.
Ventilace (vstup)
Ventilatie (stopcontact)
()
Ilmanvaihto (poistoaukko)
Szellzs (csatlakoz)
Ventilation (udtag)
Ventilasjon (utlp)
Wentylacja (wyjcie)
Havalandrma (k)
Nastaviteln pka nklonu podstavce
Aanpasbare regelaar voor kantelvoet

Sdettvn kntjalan vipu
Az llthat dlsszg lbazat belltkarja
Hndtag til justerbar drejefod
Spak for regulerbar vippefot
Dwignia stopki regulacji nachylenia z moliwoci dostosowania
Ayarlanabilir Eim Ayak Kolu
Nastaviteln nklon podstavce
Aanpasbare kantelvoet

Sdettv kntjalka
llthat dlsszg lbazat
Justerbar drejefod
Regulerbar vippefot
Stopka regulacji nachylenia z
moliwoci dostosowania
Ayarlanabilir Eim Aya
Adjust the tilt foot
Upravte podstavec pro naklonn
Juster den vipbare fod

Sd stjalkaa
lltsa be a dnthet lbazatot
De kantelvoet aanpassen
Still inn vippefoten
Dostosuj stopk regulacji nachylenia
Eim ayan ayarlayn
(! Page 22 of the Users Manual)
Rear Foot
Zadn podstavec
Achterste voet

Takajalka
Hts lb
Bagerste fod
Bakre fot
Stopka tylna
Arka ayak
Up
Nahoru
Omhoog
Ylspin
Fel
Op
Opp
Gra
Yukar
Down
Dol
Omlaag
Alaspin
Le
Ned
Ned
D
Aa
Zoom
Mtko
Zoomen
Zoomaus
Nagyts/Kicsinyts
Zoom
Zoom
Powikszenie
Zoom
(! page 23 of the Users Manual)
Focus
Zaosten
Fokus
Tarkennus
Fkusz
Focus
Fokuser
Ostro
Netleme
Correcting Keystone Distortion [KEYSTONE]
Oprava lichobnkovho zkreslen [TRAPZ]
Korrigering af trapezforvrngning [TRAPEZ]
[ ]
Trapetsivristymn korjaaminen [KEYSTONE]
A trapz alak deformci korrekcija [TRAPZTORZTS]
De keystonevervorming corrigeren [TRAPEZIUM]
Korriger trapesformen [KEYSTONE]
Regulacja znieksztacenia trapezowego opcja [ZNIEKSZTAC. TRAPEZ.]
Trapez Distorsiyonunu Dzeltme [KLTTAS]
7N8N0741
Printed in China
Ver. 2 02/10 (S)
1
2
Turn off the projector.
Vypnte projektor.
Sluk projektoren.
.
Katkaise projektorin virta.
Kapcsolja ki a projektort.
Schakel de projector uit.
Sl projektoren av.
Wycz projektor.
Projektr kapatn.
Unplug the power cable.
Odpojte napjec kabel.
Trk strmstikket ud.
.
Irrota virtajohto.
Hzza ki a tpkbelt.
Koppel de voedingskabel los.
Trekk ut strmkabelen.
Odcz przewd zasilajcy.
G kablosunu kartn.
Cautions for Maintenance Services
1. How to start the set under the condition that the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are
removed
The Lamp Cover switch (COVER PWB ASSY) of this model is mounted on the top of the Power Case.
The set cannot be started if the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are left removed.
This is because the Lamp Cover switch can be turned OFF only if the LAMP COVER ASSY is removed.
Follow the steps shown below when intending to start up the set under the condition that the LAMP
COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are removed.
1 Provide for carton (or cardboard paper)
Length: 30 ~ 40 (mm), Depth: 50 ~ 60 (mm), Thickness: 2 ~ 3 (mm)
2 Insert the carton (or cardboard paper) in the right side of the Lamp Cover switch.
(Insert it along the Lamp Cover switch.)
Caution: Under the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY and LAMP COVER ASSY are removed, the
set can be started by the method described above. However, the set cannot be started under
the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY only is mounted and the LAMP COVER ASSY is
removed.
2. Cautions for the installation of LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY
When installing the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY on the set, the TOP COVER ASSY only
should be mounted frst. Then, the LAMP COVER ASSY can be mounted.
If the installation work is carried out in the state that the LAMP COVER ASSY is mounted on the TOP
COVER ASSY, the Lamp Cover switch may be damaged by the embossed part of the LAMP COVER
ASSY.

ON by PUSH
LAMP COVER SWITCH
Insert the carton
Insert it in the red
frame section.
Confdential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.
4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Operational checks
A certain degree of fault can be analyzed by simply checking the operating conditions of ordinary use.
Before removing the top cover, check the POWER indicator and the STATUS indicator.
Is the POWER indicator lit in orange in the standby state?
No The power cord is wrongly connected.
The connector (POPA) is unplugged.
The power unit is faulty. (VCCS+6.5V and VCCS+15V not supplied)
Yes The peripheral circuits of the MAIN PWB DDP2230 are faulty.
The peripheral circuits of the SUB CPU (IC2606) are faulty.
Fuses (F2601/F2602) are broken.
Is the STATUS indicator blinking in red in the standby state?
Yes [Blinking once every 3 seconds]
The lamp cover is dislodged.
The connector (POLB) is unplugged.
[Blinking twice every 4 seconds]
The inner temperature is unusual, deviating from the range of normal
ambient temperature conditions.
The connector (POBM) is unplugged.
[Blinking 4 times every 6 seconds]
The fan is faulty. Otherwise, the fan rotation is blocked by intrusion of
foreign substances.
The connector (POFA/FB) is unplugged.
[Blinking 6 times every 8 seconds]
The lamp fails to light.
No The connector (PODC/PODB/POCW/LAMP) is unplugged.
Is the LAMP indicator lit in red in the standby state?
Yes Lamps life has expired. The permissible extension time for replacement has
been exceeded. Starting is impossible.
No Replace the lamp.
Is the LAMP indicator blinking in red in the state of STANDBY and POWER ON?
Yes [Blinking once per second]
Lamps life has expired. Between lamps life and the permissible ex-
tension time for replacement (100H).
No Replace the lamp.
When the power is ON, does the power indicator blink in green for one minute? Is it lit in green since then?
No
The MAIN PWB is faulty.
Destruction of program or data.
Yes
Normal in regard to starting and operation.
4-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is no voltage output at the POPA/PODC connector, check the power block following the steps shown
below.
Is F2601 and F2602 (fuse) blown out in the Power Supply PWB?
Yes
Replace the fuse.
No
Is there an input (100~400V) available at both ends of R2612 in the board?
No
The DC power block is faulty.
Yes
When the power is ON and the PODC (Pin 4) LAMP_EN is low, is the PODC (Pin 1) LAMP_FLG main-
tained at the low level?
No
The BALLAST PWB is faulty.
Otherwise, the connector (5-pin) is pulled out in the board.
Yes
Any circuit other than the Power Supply and BALLAST PWB is faulty. (Lamp broken)
2. Power block
Problems in the power-related circuits will cause various kinds of malfunction, such as no presentation of pic-
tures, no lamp lighting, failure in fan rotation, and others.
In case of any malfunction, examine whether the present phenomenon really comes from a fault in the power
circuit and check the power block.
Check whether the voltage outputs specifed below are available at the POPA and PODC connectors of
the MAIN PWB.
PODC
POPA
PIN No. Signal name Standby Power ON Related circuits
1 S6.5V +6.5V +6.5V SUB-CPU, video input
2 GND GND GND GND
3 S15 +15V +15V Fan driver, CPU, video processor, audio
4 S15 +15V +15V Fan driver, CPU, video processor, audio
5 GND GND GND GND
6 GND GND GND GND
7 PFC-ON 0V +3.3V Standby power consumption control
PIN No. Signal name Standby Power ON Related circuits
1 RxD/LAMP_FLG +3.3V 0V
UART_RxD signal/Detection of
lampsunlighting
2 GND GND GND GND
3 +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V
4 LAMP_EN +3.3V +3.3V Lamps lighting control
5 TxD/LAMP_PW +3.3V +3.3V/+1.5V UART_RxD signal/Lamp power control
4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Are there any digital signal output at 52~58Pins, 60~61Pins, 82~85Pins, 87~91Pins of IC1203?
Yes
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
No
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?
Yes
Go to 5.
No
3 Is the signal available at both ends of FB1202 (CV signal)?
Yes
No
4 Is the signal available at both ends of JL1201 (CV signal)?
Yes
Check Terminal M1202 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
No
Check the signals for external video output equipment.
5 Are the signals available at both ends of FB1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and FB1204 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again
No
6 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and JL1205 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes
No
3. I/O, Sync, and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input)
4-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Is there a digital signal output at Pins 2~9, Pins 12~19, and Pins 70~77 of IC1008?
Yes
No
2 Are the signals available at both ends of R1060 (Rch), R1058 (Gch), and R1057 (Bch)?
Yes
No
3 Are the signals available at both ends of C1033 (Rch), C1031 (Gch), and C1030 (Bch)?
Yes
Check the Buffer circuit.
No
4 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1011 (Rch), JL1012 (Gch), and JL1013 (Bch)?
Yes
No
1 Is the horizontal sync signal available at both ends of R1268?
No
Go to 3 of 3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input).
Yes
2 Is the vertical sync signal available at both ends of R1267?
No
Yes
3-2. No presentation of RGB / COMPONENT images (For video system / D-SUB input)
1 Are the signals available at both ends of R1039 (horizontal sync signal) and R1067 (vertical sync signal)?
Yes
No
Yes
No
3-4. No presentation of video images (For video system/D-Sub input)
4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Are there any digital signal output at 52~58Pins, 60~61Pins, 82~85Pins, 87~91Pins of IC1206?
Yes
No
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?
Yes
Go to 5.
No
3 Is the signal available at both ends of FB1202 (CV signal)?
Yes
No
4 Is the signal available at both ends of JL1201 (CV signal)?
Yes
No
5 Are the signals available at both ends of FB1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and FB1204 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again
No
6 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and JL1205 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes
No
3. I/O, Sync, and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP216)
4-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
3-2. No presentation of RGB / COMPONENT images (For video system / D-SUB input)
3-2-1. For COMPUTER_1 input
4-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Is the horizontal sync signal available at both ends of R1268?
No
Yes
2 Is the vertical sync signal available at both ends of R1267?
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Check the peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
No
Check the signals at Terminal M1001 or external video output equipment.
Yes
No
Yes
Check the peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
No
Check the signals at Terminal M1003 or external video output equipment.
3-4. No presentation of video images (For video system/D-Sub input)
4-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Are the connector to POF01/ POCW / PODB?
No
Connector connections are defective.
Yes
Are the following signals input in the state of MAIN PWB Power ON?
Is the logic of SYSRSTZ, LAMPEN, and POWERGOOD correct?
POWERGOOD (Normal: Hi) Check position: R2624
SYSRSTZ (Normal: Hi) Check position: POJTAG_15Pin
LAMPEN (Normal: Hi) Check position: R2661
No
The MAIN PWB is faulty.
Yes
Is a power voltage 1.2V/1.8V/3.3V input at IC1401?
No
IC2602 is faulty.
Yes
There is no abnormality in operation.
4. DMD Driver block
4-1. Picture errors
4-1-1. [Symptom] No pictures presented
Are the following voltages available at JL1801 / JL1802 / JL1803?
JL1801 +23V~26V
JL1802 26V
JL1803 +8.5V
No
Check whether the signal level is low at Pin 6 (OE) of IC1801.
If there is no problem, IC1801 is faulty.
If the signal level is Hi, IC1401 is considered to be faulty.
Yes
Are the connector connected to POF01 that is between MAIN PWB and DMD PWB?
No
Yes
There is no problem in operation.
4-1-2. [Symptom] No pictures presented; picture error in horizontal lines
4-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Are there a +12V input available at Pin 9/22/37/42 of IC2602?
No
IC2606 is faulty.
Yes
Is the reset terminal, Pin 48 of IC2602, maintained at Hi level?
No
IC1401 is faulty.
IC2602 is faulty or the circuit is faulty because of poor soldering.
Yes
It is considered to be malfunction in color wheel itself.
4-2. Color wheel error
4-2-1. [Symptom] No color wheel rotation
Is the connector connected to POF01 that is between MAIN PWB and DMD PWB?
No
Yes
The DMD itself is considered to be faulty. Otherwise, the socket is faulty.
4-1-3. [Symptom] Vertical lines in the screen
4-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
5. Wired LAN
5-1. Wired LAN is out of order
Is RJ45 LED blinking?
NO Is the voltage of 3.3V output at Pin 1 of POLA?
NO Poor connection of the PORJ (Main board
side)/POLA (LAN board side)
Poor mounting in peripheral circuit.
YES
Check the peripheral circuit of IC8004, and LAN cable connection.
Otherwise, poor soldering of M8001.
YES
After execute the reset at the RESET/NETWORK SETTINGS, is it possible to communicate through the
Virtual Remote and the like?
No Is it possible to communicate at the PING 192. 168. 0. 10?
NO Check the communication setting of PC.
YES
Check the section between IC8004 peripheral ~ POLA and between
IC8004 peripheral ~ IC1401/IC2606.
YES
Normal in regard to operation.
4-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Audio block (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
6-1. [Symptom] No audio signals are generated.
Are signal waveforms available at POSP Pin 1/2?
YES Silk covered wire of speaker broken, cable disconnection, poor contact
around connectors.
NO
Are audio signals available at IC2206 Pin 2/13?
YES Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
NO
NO
Possibly attributable to a fault in speaker itself.
4-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Audio block (Applicable to NP216)
6-1. [Symptom] No audio signals are generated.
Are signal waveforms available at POSP Pin 1/2?
YES Silk covered wire of speaker broken, cable disconnection, poor contact
around connectors.
NO
NO
What is the present input selection?
Computer1 g To 1
Computer2 g To 2
VIDEO, S-VIDEO g To 3
1 Is an audio signal available at Pin 1/32 of IC2206? Are there waveforms at Pins 13 and 14?
NO Check peripheral circuits around Terminal M2202 and also external audio
output equipment.
output equipment.
output equipment.
4-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-2.[Symptom] No audio output is available for external equipment.
NO Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
YES
Are audio signals available at both ends of R2286 and R2287?
YES Check the peripheral circuits.
NO
Check the audio systems of external equipment.
5-1
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
PC Control Software for Service
1. Outline Software Descriptions
2. Equipment to be used and Environment
3. Software Installation Procedures
3-1. Main adjustment software
4. Repair and adjustment procedures
4.1. Method of start and ending of adjustments
4-2 Replacement of the MAIN PWB
4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel
4-4. Miscellany
5. Other Functional Descriptions
5-1. Input Level
5-2. Test Paterns
6. Error Messages
5-2
1. Outline Software Descriptions
This is the PC control software to be used for the servicing adjustments needed during the replacement of
the MAIN PWB, optical engine unit (including CWC PWB and DMD chip), projector lens, of the DLP pro-
jector, NP110/115/210/215/216.
This software is applicable to the following purposes:
Color Wheel adjustment
Lamp/Projector usage time setting
Read/Write of the factory adjusting data (Color Correction, Color Wheel) and the usage time data.
Adjustment of input level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast)
2. Equipment to be used and Environment
<Equipment to be used>
Software for servicing adjustments (Ser_NP215ver***.exe ***: Version Notation)
Personal computer (WindowsXP/2000/98 in operation and either of the serial ports COM1-COM9 is D-
SUB 9-pin)
Serial cable (D-SUB9pin-D-SUB9pin cross (reverse) cable)
<Personal computer setting for adjusting pattern screen outputs>
PC resolution, frequency, and No. of colors
Make setting at VESA XGA (1024 x 768) 60Hz, High color (16 bits) or more.
The adjusting pattern outputs available for the personal computer are only the test patterns in the Input
Level Adjust screen or only the test patterns in the Color Wheel Adjust screen. All other adjusting pat-
terns to be used are the built-in test patterns.
3. Software Installation Procedures
3-1. Main adjustment software
This software is composed of the following:
Main software for servicing adjustments (Ser_NP215Series_Ver***.exe***: Version Notation)
Various DLL fles
It is distributed from CD-ROM. Installation into the PC is carried out in the procedures described below.
1 Copy all the fles to an arbitrary folder. These fles are located in "Service Adjustment" of the fur-
nished CD-ROM.
5-3
4. Repair and Adjustment Procedures
4-1. Method of start and ending of adjustments
<Method of adjustment start>
According to [2. Equipment to be used and Environment] - <Connecting method>, assume the condi-
tion that the PJ and the PC are connected through a serial cable. In this state, start the servicing ad-
justment software (Ser_NP215Series_ver***.exe).
Click [Setup] to open the Setup screen and select the COM port that is connected to the PJ.
[Baud Rate] is 38,400 bps for default setting on the PJ side. Upon completion, return to the previous
stage with [Return].
5-4
Click [Adjust Start] for model discrimination and initial data read.
* When model discrimination is normally fnished, various adjusting buttons in [Adjust] become avail-
able.
<Method of adjustment ending>
When adjustments of 4.2~4.4 below are fnished, click [Adjust End].
Clear the data acquired with [Adjust End] so that adjustments can be carried out for another set.
* When another set is adjusted subsequently, start the work with [Adjust Start].
* If adjustment of another set is attempted without performing [Adjust End], an error takes place as a
result of model discrimination.
When closing the adjustment program, click the [Close] button.
If [Adjust Start] has already been executed, [Close] cannot be accomplished unless [Adjust End] is
carried out.
5-5
4-2 Replacement of the MAIN PWB
The MAIN PWB can be replaced in the procedures specifed below.
All Data copy
<All Data copy>
While the PJ power supply is maintained in the standby state, open the Data screen by clicking [Data]
of the main screen of the servicing software.
According to the processes of (1) and (2) below, make Read / Write of All Data.
All Data mentioned here denotes various Factory Adjusting Data (Color Correction, Color Wheel) and
Usage Time.
5-6
(1) All Data Read
Prior to replacement, read out the Main PWB data presently used and save these data in a fle.
Check them in [All Data], click the [Read] button to designate the fle name, and save the data.
* According to the status of failure, the data may fail to be saved. In such a case, carry out the
work for [4-4. Miscellany].
(2) All Data Write
After the replacement of the MAIN PWB, click the [Write] button to select the saved fle and write
the data in.
(3) End
The main screen can be recovered with [Return].
When Data Write is carried out, the characters of [Data] become bold in the main screen.
5-7
4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel
To replace the optical engine unit or the color wheel, the following actions:
Color Wheel adjustments
<Color wheel adjustments>
Click [Color Wheel] of the servicing main software and open the Color Wheel Adjust screen.
Make color wheel adjustments according to (1), (2), and (3) below.
(1) Adjusting test pattern output
Enter an RGB output of the personal computer and click the [Ramp WRGB] button of Test (PC
Out) so that the adjusting scale pattern can be displayed.
5-8
(2) Adjustments for the optimal value
Use the scroll bar of Index Adjust and make adjustments to obtain the optimal value at which a
color gap (Vertical Pattern) disappears.
However in this case, adjustments shall be carried out to obtain the optimal value because there
is a certain amount of width at the point where the color gap disappears.
(The optimal value denotes the center value of the width at the point where the color gap disap-
pears.)
(1) When the scroll bar is moved to 0, a color gap appears.
(2) Raise the scroll bar to the level where the color gap disappears. At that time, record the value
indicated. (Example: 250)
(3) Go on raising the scroll bar until the color gap appears.
(4) Starting from the point where the color gap appears, lower the scroll bar until the color gap
disappears. (Example: 300)
(5) Calculate the mean value of the recorded two values. (250+300)/2=275
(6) Adjust the scroll bar until the value of the calculation result can be secured. (Example: 275)
(7) Confrm that there is no color gap in the screen.
(3) Preservation of the adjusted value.
Click the [Set] button when the optimal value has been adjusted completely.

(4) End
Return to the main screen with [Return].
Upon the completion of adjustments, the characters of [Color Wheel] become bold in the main
screen.
The status without any color gap
(vertical pattern)
The status when the color gap
(vertical pattern) appears slightly
5-9
4-4. Miscellany
The following adjustments are required in the case of failure in <All Data Copy> to be performed at
the time of MAIN PWB replacement.
Usage Time setup
Color Wheel adjustment (*)
* If the procedures 4.3 are executed, these adjustments are not required.
For Color Wheel adjustments, refer to [4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel].
<Usage Time setup>
* If the present Lamp / Projector Usage Time is different from actual usage time, modifcation of time
into the correct usage time can be performed only by taking the following actions:
* When Read / Write of All Data is performed with [Data] at the time of MAIN PWB replacement,
Lamp / Projector Usage Time is also copied correctly. Therefore, it is unnecessary to set up any
time-related values.
* If the correct usage time is unclear, never use it.
Click [Usage Time] of the servicing main software to open the Usage Time Setting screen.
Carry out Usage Time setting according to (1) and (2) described below.
5-10
(1) Preliminary confrmation
The adjusting set shall remain in the standby state.
Select the type of changing Usage Time from [Change usage time].
(2) Setup
For the lamp, set up Usage Time [Hours] and Remainder [%] by means of the scroll bar. For the
projector, set up Usage Time [Hours] with the scroll bar. Click the [SET] button in the [Data] box
and save the setting value in the projector.
* When Usage Time is changed, the changed time is displayed in the editor located underneath.
* When recovering the previous time after change, click the [RESET] button to recover the initial
data.
(3) End
When Usage Time is changed, the characters of [Usage Time] become bold in the main screen.
5-11

5. Other Functional Descriptions
5-1. Input Level
Used for the adjustment of Input Level.
* Since the input level of the MAIN PWB has been already adjusted, no general adjustments are re-
quired any more.
Click [Input Level] of the servicing main software to open the Input Level Adjust screen.
According to the procedures of (1) ~ (4) below, make adjustments of RGB / Video / Component (DVD) /
Component (HDTV).
(1) Adjustment of RGB Input Level (sub-brightness and sub-contrast)
Select [RGB] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As an adjusting signal, enter a gray scale input in the input terminal of Computer IN by the use of
an RGB signal generator. Otherwise, enter an RGB output of the personal computer and display the
gray scale with the [Scale] button in the Test (PC Out) Box.
To avoid black chroma, high-light chroma, or coloring in the gray scale, adjust the sub-brightness
and sub-contrast with the scroll bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] button in the Data Box.
(2) Adjustment of Video Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)
Select [Video] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As an adjusting signal, enter a gray scale input from the Video signal generator.
To avoid high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-contrast G (Y) with the scroll bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] button in the Data Box.
(3) Adjustment of Component (DVD) Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)
Select [Comp (DVD)] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As adjusting signals, enter a 480i gray scale and a split color bar in the input terminal of Computer
IN by the use of a Component (DVD) signal generator.
To avoid high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-contrast with the split color bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] in the Data Box.
5-12
(4) Adjustment of Component (HDTV) Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast)
Select [Comp (HDTV)] in the Adjust Signal Box.
As adjusting signals, enter a 480p, 720p, or 1080i gray scale and a split color bar in the input termi-
nal of Computer IN by the use of a Component (HDTV) signal generator.
To avoid black chroma and high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-brightness and sub-
contrast with the split color bar.
After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] in the Data Box.
(5) End
When Usage Time is changed, the characters of [Usage Time] become bold in the main screen.
* When recovering the previous setting after adjustments, click the [RESET] button to recover the ini-
tial data.
* In regard to the numerals beside the scroll bar, the value at the time of adjustment start is displayed
on the left of the arrow mark and the present value on the right of the arrow mark.
* The data adjusted by means of a scroll bar are temporary. These data cannot immediately be saved
in the projector. Execute [SET] frst, and then write the data in the E2PROM.
* In all cases other than RGB signal adjustments, signals of the personal computer cannot be used.
5-13
5-2. Test Patterns
The test patterns are used when controlling the projector from the personal computer.
At the [Power] box, data of Projector Power Supply ON/OFF are generated. At the [Input Select]
box, data of the situation of Projector Input Changeover are generated. At the [Test Pattern] box,
data of the various test patterns are generated.
5-14
6. Error Messages
TIME OUT (ACK)!
This is a communication error arising in conjunction with the PJ.
Check connections and confrm whether the PJ main power supply is turned ON.
TIME OUT (Data)!
This is a communication error arising in conjunction with the PJ.
Check connections and confrm whether the PJ is free from any abnormality. Try it again.
Comm Open Error
Failure in opening the serial port.
Confrm if there is any application that uses the serial port or whether the serial port number is
wrong.
Comm Close Error
Failure in closing the serial port.
Check whether any other application is using the serial port.
File format error!, Address Error
The data format is different from that of the fle specifed at the time of data writing from the fle.
Specify the correct fle.
Comparison error!!
Failed in writing various data (data, input level, color wheel, usage time).
If the error remains even after retry, this may be subject to a fault in the board.
No Signal Input!!
This is a no-signal error possibly appearing during input level adjustments.
Confrm if there is a signal input available at the selected input terminal.
Please check the All or other
No check mark is attached to All or any other data while data reading is executed.
Select the data to be read out.
DATA READ ERROR!, DATA SEND ERROR!
This is a Read/Send error in conjunction with the buffer in the serial port.
There is possibility of PC malfunction. Try to restart the PC.
5-15
ACK Error!!
This is a communication error with the PJ.
Check the PJ status and retry.
Model error!!
The PJ is not the objective model (NP215s).
Model check Error (Data Read)!!
This is a communication error with the PJ.
Check connections and confrm whether the PJ is normal. Then retry.
Model check Errror (2)!! Please begin with a start
The behavior of PJ is different from that at the time of adjustment start.
When adjusting another PJ, start it with the Adjust Start button.
5-16
Model-Specifc Data Writing Procedure for NP215 Series
(NP216 is not applicable)
1. Model-specifc data writing procedure
Writing procudures shall be performed from step 1) to step 2).
1) Writing the model-specifc VerUpField data
Writing software : PJUpgrader2vupf.exe
File name to be written : N-np***_vupf.bin
2) Writing the model-specifc product data
Writing software : PJUpgrader2.exe
File name to be written : np***_mdata_******.bin
Note) Names of fles in which the model-specifc product data are written shall be as follows:
For MAIN PWB ASSY P/N: 81S****, use data version "0.10.018".
For MAIN PWB ASSY P/N: 81T****, use data version "2.00.035".
The part numbers of the maintenance parts for the MAIN PWB ASSY (supply parts) are as specifed below.
(List of MAIN PWB ASSY)
List of MAIN PWB ASSY
Model
Product
Revision
Part Number
Product
Revision
Part Number Remark
NP215
From A to C
81S35FA2
D and after 81T80FA2
As soon as the inventory is finished, the
part numbers 81S31FA2 and 81S35FA2 will
be switched over to 81T80FA2 that is for the
supply part. (Unified to 81T80FA2 for all
models)
NP115
81S31FA2
or 81S35FA2
NP110
Model
Product
Revision
Part Number
Product
Revision
Part Number Remark
NP215G/215+
From A to C
81S36FA2
As soon as the inventory is finished, the
part numbers 81S32FA2 and 81S36FA2 will
be switched over to 81T81FA2 that is for the
supply part. (Unified to 81T81FA2 for all
models)
NP210G/210+
81S32FA2
or 81S36FA2
NP115G/115+
NP110G/110+
Model
Product
Revision
Part Number
Product
Revision
Part Number Remark
NP215J
From A to C
81S36FA2
As soon as the inventory is fnished, the part
numbers 81S32FA2 and 81S36FA2 will be
switched over to 81S36FA3 that is for the
supply part. (Unified to 81S36FA3 for all
models)
NP210J
81S32FA2
or 81S36FA2
NP115J
NP110J

3) Initial setting of writing software
[COM port] : Set the COM port of used PC.
[Baud rate] : 115200 bps
5-17
2. Operation Procedure
Prior to operation, install writing software (PJUpgrader2vupf.exe and PJUpgrader2.exe) and fles for the
model to be written (n-np***_vupf.bin and np***_mdata_******.bin).
1) Model-specifc VerUpField data
1 Connect PKG (set) to PC by using PC control cable.
2 Make sure that electrical power is not applied tp PKG (set).
3 With pressing both [ENTER] and [EXIT] keys, turn the power supply on.
4 Make sure that Power LED illuminates green.
5 Start up PJUpgrader2vupf.exe ( ) previously installed.
The following fles will be generated in the folder:
6 Start up PJUpgrader2vupf.exe ( ).
5-18
7 Press [choose] button to select the fle to be written.(Ex: NP215)
8 Check that the set and PC are properly connected each other, then press [Flash] button.
Message "Do you start fash write?" is displayed.
9 When [Yes(Y)] button is pressed, writing is started.
(Progress bar showing writing situation is displayed.)
Message "Write Finished!" is displayed, when completed.Press [OK] button to fnish the operation.
5-19
2) Model-specifc production data
1 Connect PKG (set) to PC by using PC control cable.
2 Make sure that electrical power is not applied tp PKG (set).
3 With pressing both [EXIT] and [MENU] keys, turn the power supply on.
4 Make sure that Power LED illuminates green.
5 Start up PJUpgrader2.exe ( ) previously installed.
The following fles will be generated in the folder:

6 Start up PJUpgrader2.exe ( ).
5-20
7 Press [choose] button to select the fle to be written.(Ex: NP215 Version "0.10.018")
8 Check that the set and PC are properly connected each other, then press [Flash] button.
Message "Do you start fash write?" is displayed.
9 When [Yes(Y)] button is pressed, writing is started.
(Progress bar showing writing situation is displayed.)
Message "Write Finished!" is displayed, when completed.Press [OK] button to fnish the operation.
5-21
3. Error Messages
1 Header information is illegal.-308
Check the selected fle.
PJUpgrader2 for vupf cannot rewrite the farm data.
2 Attestation failure.-1001
When rewriting the version up feld, it is required to set the projector in writing only mode in advance.

3 The model information of the fle conficts with that of the connected projector.-1002
Check the projector connecting to the selected fle.
The projector connected is not that the selected fle can write for.
5-22
1. Adjustment of the optical axis (Shadow adjustment)
1-1. Facilities to be used
Screwdriver for CL1 adjustment and fxing: Hexagon screwdriver (Opposite side: 2.0mm)
Screw fxing adhesive agent
PC for PC control
PC control cable (RS232C serial cable)
1-2. Shadow adjustments (Light Tunnel adjustments)
1 Using the adjusting software, project a signal (all-white screen: Test Pattern - Raster 100%) for
shadow adjustments.
Adjust the projection size to 50 inches or above. Set the zoom lever position to the wide end and
adjust the focus.
2 Turn the adjusting screw in front of the set and adjust the shadow in the vertical direction on the
projector screen. Stop the adjusting screw where the vertical radiation margin at the top and the
bottom is equally balanced. (See 2 in Fig. 1 of Item 1-5.)
3 Turn the adjusting screw located behind the set through the hole for MAIN PWB adjustments and
adjust the shadow in the horizontal direction on the projector screen. Stop the adjusting screw
where the horizontal radiation margin at the right and the left is equally balanced. (See 3 in Fig. 1
and Fig. 2 of Item 1-5.)
4 Apply an adhesive agent to the boundary sections (2 positions) of the adjusting screw and the
engine base in order to fx the adjusting screw.
(4 in Fig. 1 of Item 1-5)
5-23
1-3. Shadow adjustment fow
Start of adjustment
Make Vertical shadow control. (1-2-2)
Check vertical shadow.
Make horizontal shadow control. (1-2-3)
There is a shadow
horizontal
There is a shadow
vertical
No shadow
No shadow
Shadow
present
Shadow
present
Check vertical and horizontal shadow.
End of adjustment
1-4. How to handle irradiation margin in shadow adjustments
Shadow adjustments shall be carried out so that the top, bottom, right, and left irradiation margins can
be evenly balanced.
Since all area of the radiation margins cannot be seen at a time, move the shadow upwards and
downwards, and to the right and left until its one end appears. Examining the amount of margin at the
top, bottom, right, and left, stop the adjusting screw when the radiation margins are equally balanced.
Vertical shadow adjustments
Horizontal shadow
Turn the adjusting screw clockwise.
(Shadow on the upper side)
Position where the radiation
margins are equally balanced
Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise.
(Shadow on the lower side)
Turn the adjusting screw clockwise.
(Shadow on the left side)
Position where the radiation
margins are equally balanced
Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise.
(Shadow on the right side)
5-24
1-5. Adjusting position (Screw for shadow adjustments)
Vertical
adjustments
2
Horizontal
adjustments
3
Adhesion 4
Fig. 1. LT Adjusting Block (1)
Fig. 1. LT Adjusting Block (2)
Horizontal
adjustments
Horizontal
adjusting screw
MAIN PWB
adjusting hole
Adjusting
screwdriver
3
6-1
SERVICEMAN MODE
Mode
Functions Expert Service
SOURCE>TEST PATTERN X
ADJUST>PICTURE>SHARPNESS
ADJUST>EXPERT
SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE
INFO.>USAGE TIME>PROJECTOR HOURS USED
INFO.>SOURCE>RESOLUTION X
INFO.>VERSION>BIOS
SETUP>VERSION-CPU
SETUP>VERSION (2)>MODEL NAME/API/FAN/OSD X
1. List of functions
NP215s Serviceman Mode
2. Mode changes
2.1. Expert mode
With the [HELP] key kept pressed, and while the Information Screen is displayed, the keys are
pressed in the order specifed below.
[Top] -> [Left] -> [HELP]
Press the [MENU] key to display the menu, confrm that [Expert] has been displayed on the lower
right of the menu screen.
2.2. Serviceman mode
When the keys are pressed for 3 seconds in the order of [HELP] [ENTER] [HELP] [ENTER]
[HELP] [ENTER] [MENU] in the state of Power ON, a menu of "Enter Passcode" is dis-
played.
Press the selector keys in the order of [UP] [RIGHT] [LEFT] [RIGHT] [RIGHT] [RIGHT]
[UP] [UP] [ENTER].
Press the [MENU] key to display the menu, confrm in this state that [SERVICE] has been dis-
played on the lower right of the menu screen.
6-2
SERVICEMAN MODE
2.3. How to withdraw from the mode
When the [EXIT] key is pressed in the state that no menu is displayed, the user mode can be re-
covered.
Return to the standby state by pressing the [POWER] key. When starting is effected again, the
user mode is then recovered.
2.4. Contents of display
When the Expert Mode or the Serviceman Mode is selected, the following functions are added to the
menu:
Display of Information
Information below is displayed, though this information is usually not displayed:
For Expert mode:
Information > Usage Time > (Projector Hours Used)
Information >Version > (BIOS)
Information >Version > (SUB-CPU)
For Serviceman mode:
Information >SOURCE > (RESOLUTION)
Information >VERSION (2)> (MODEL NAME/API/OSD)
Addition of adjustment functions on the menu
The adjustment functions are displayed though they are usually not displayed, and these adjust-
ments become possible.
For Expert mode:
ADJUST > PICTURE > (SHARPNESS)
ADJUST > (EXPERT)
For Serviceman mode:
SETUP > EXPERT > (MESSAGE) are available in the Serviceman mode.
Modifcation of the processing contents of existing functions
In the Serviceman mode, the items of initialize are increased in regard to Factory Default.
6-3
SERVICEMAN MODE
3. Additional Functions
3-1. Functions to be added to the Expert Mode
3-1-1. ADJUST>PICTURE>SHARPNESS
This function is used to adjust the clearness of video images.
3-1-2. ADJUST>EXPERT
This function is used for the adjustment of the brightness for R, G, and B independently of each
other.
3-1-3. SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE
This function is used to make ON/OFF setting of messages to be displayed on the screen in the
middle of projection.
However, the messages specifed below are displayed even though OFF has been selected.
Messages to be displayed at the time of starting when a security lock is effected.
6-4
SERVICEMAN MODE
3-2. Functions to be added to the Serviceman Mode
3-2-1. SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE
This function is used to set up ON/OFF for the message displayed in the screen during projection.

3.2.2. SOURCE>TEST PATTERN
When the [SOURCE] key is pressed, [Test Pattern] is added to the source menu.
When [TEST PATTERN] is selected, all white is displayed.
When [MENU] is pressed and [TEST PATTERN] is selected from the source menu, a list of test
patterns is displayed.
When [Test Pattern] is selected and the [ENTER] key is pressed, the selected test pattern is dis-
played.
For canceling, press the [MENU] key and select any source other than [Test Pattern].
Setting Displayed pattern
Raster 100% All-white raster
Raster 0% All-black raster
Raster RED 100% Red 100% raster
Raster BLUE 100% Blue 100% raster
Raster GREEN 100% Green 100% raster
Raster BLUE 60% Blue 60% raster
Raster 30% Brightness 30% raster
Raster 10% Brightness 10% raster
Cross Hatch Cross hatch
Ramp H 512-gradation horizontal ramp
7-1
CLEANING
Cleaning for the DMD, color wheel, light tunnel, and mirror
Cautions : a) Cleaner fuid
Use absolute alcohol.
If the fuid does not dry out and water drops remain, replace the fuid with new absolute alco-
hol.
b) Cleaning
During the cleaning, do not touch the cleaning surface directly with the hand, or do not rub it
strongly.
Such careless handling may contaminate or impair the cleaning surface, and adversely affect
the video images directly.
1. Cleaning of the projector lens
Method of cleaning
Get clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe off contaminants by drawing a circle from
the center of the lens, moving to the periphery.
Cleaning Cloth (24BS7251)
2. DMD cleaning
Cleaning procedure
Use clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe the DMD surface (glass surface) together
with dust. Furthermore, wipe it in dry state.
3. Cleaning for the color wheel
Caution: The color wheel is made of a thin glass plate. Handle it with utmost care and never hold the
glass surface directly.
Cleaning procedure
Use clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe the color wheel together with dust, from its
center area to the periphery in the direction of the arrow.
7-2
CLEANING
4. Cleaning of the light tunnel
Caution: If dirt or contaminant of a cotton swab is attached to the inner surface of the light-tunnel, such a
contaminant may be transferred to the image. Therefore, the cotton swab has to be wet with a
cleaner solution before use.
Cleaning procedure
Get a clean cotton swab (baby size) wet with a cleaner solution and wipe the inner surface of the light-
tunnel together with contaminants.
If contamination looks too rigorous and improvements by cleaning seem to be diffcult to carry out, then
it is recommended to replace the LT ASSY as a whole.
5. Cleaning of the CL3
Caution: The CL3 is made of plastic lens materials. Therefore, it can be hurt easily. Unlike other parts,
cleaning by a wiping action (rubbing action) is strictly prohibited.
Method of cleaning
Use air blow or the like, often used for camera lens cleaning. The only applicable method of cleaning is
the removal of contaminants by blowing them away.
6. Cleaning of other optical parts
Caution: Various optical parts are made of glass. Handle them with care. Since they can easily be hurt,
do not touch them directly.
Method of cleaning
Use the cleaning cloth and remove dust along the refecting surface of each optical part. When remov-
ing dust or contaminants accumulated around the optical parts or on the bottom of the engine assembly
block (light path), use a blower that is available on general market.
7. Cleaning of other main unit
For the replacement of the lamp or at the time of periodic inspection, cleaning is needed for the side sur-
faces of the main unit and ventilation holes.
Method of cleaning
Dust and contaminants can be removed by the use of cotton applicators, a vacuum cleaner, or the like.
8-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
1. I/O terminals (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
1.1 Video I/O terminal
VGA PC input (Mini D-Sub 15pin x 1 system)
VGA PC output (Mini D-Sub 15pin x 1 system)
Video input (RCA Phono terminal x 1 system)
S-Video input (S terminal x 1 system)
1.2 Audio input terminal
AUDIO IN input (StereoMini jack x 1 system)
1.3 Control terminal
Service terminal (D-SUB 9pin x 1 system)
1.4 Lan terminal
RJ-45 terminal (1 system) (NP215)
1. I/O terminals (Applicable to NP216)
1.1 Video input terminal
VGA For COMPUTER1 input (Mini D-Sub 15pin 1 system)
VGA For COMPUTER2 input (Mini D-Sub 15pin 1 system)
Video input (RCA Phono terminal 1 system)
S-Video input (S terminal 1 system)
1.2 Audio output terminal
For MONITOR output (Mini D-SUB 15pin 1 system)
1.3 Audio input terminal
For COMPUTER1 input (StereoMini jack 1 system)
For COMPUTER2 input (StereoMini jack 1 system)
For VIDEO input (For stereo RCA PHONO terminal and S-VIDEO in common)
1.4 Audio output terminal
COMPUTER/ VIDEO/ S-VIDEO in common (Mini jack 1 system)
1.5 Control terminal
Service terminal (D-SUB 9pin x 1 system)
1.6 Lan terminal
RJ-45 terminal (1 system)
8-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
2. Input signals
2.1 Signal level
RGB signal : 0.7Vp-p / 75
Component signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75 (Signal Y), 0.7Vp-p / 75 (Signals Cb/Cr, Pb/Pr)
Video signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75
S-Video signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75 (Signal Y), 0.286Vp-p / 75 (Signal C, burst level)
Sync signal : TTL level (positive/negative) / 1.2k
2.2 Frequencies applicable to RGB signals
Horizontal sync frequency : 15 ~ 100kHz (24kHz or above for RGB inputs)
Vertical sync frequency : 50 ~ 120Hz (The resolution over the XGA to 85Hz)
Max. resolution : UXGA + 1600dot (H) x 1200 dot (V)
2.3 Component signals
The applicable component signals are as specifed below.
525i, 625i, 480p, 576p (DVD output signal)
720p, 1080i (HDTV signal)
2.4 Video input applicable color systems
The applicable color systems are as specifed below.
NTSC3.58
NTSC4.43
PAL
PAL-M
PAL-N
PAL-60
SECAM
8-3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3. Circuit Operation
3.1 Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, PLL) (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
The video signal input entered in the Mini D-SUB15. Since then, the signal is entered in the A/D converter
(IC1008: AD9985A) via the buffer circuits.
The video signals are converted into the 8-bit digital signals at the A/D converter and then applied to the
image processor (IC1401:DDP2230). In the case of the Component signals, applied to the image proces-
sor via the A/D converter, and conversion from chroma signals to RGB signals is carried out inside the
image processor.
The video signals needed inside the A/D converter are clamped by the pulse signals (clamp pulse, mask
pulse). These signals are generated in the A/D converter under the control of I2C. The A/D converter
incorporates a PLL circuit, where the clock signals locked at the H sync signal and the timing pulses are
sent to the image processor.
3.1 Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, PLL) (Applicable to NP216)
The video signal input entered in COMPUTER1 and COMPUTER2 (Mini D-SUB Pin15) is sent to the A/D
converter (IC1008: AD9985A) via the RGB Selector (IC1011: EL4342IL).
The video signals are converted into the 8-bit digital signals at the A/D converter and then applied to the
image processor (IC1401:DDP2230). In the case of the Component signals, applied to the image proces-
sor via the A/D converter, and conversion from chroma signals to RGB signals is carried out inside the
image processor.
The video signals needed inside the A/D converter are clamped by the pulse signals (clamp pulse, mask
pulse). These signals are generated in the A/D converter under the control of I2C. The A/D converter
incorporates a PLL circuit, where the clock signals locked at the H sync signal and the timing pulses are
sent to the image processor.
3.2 Sync signal processor block
The H/V sync si gnal that was entered i n the Mi ni D-SUB15, i s appl i ed to the A/D converter
(IC1008:AD9985A) and the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) via the bus switch (IC1004). The H/V
sync signal and the Sync on Green signal that were enterd in the A/D converter, are processed for sync
separation of the H/V Sync output, Composite Sync, and G-Sync. Since then, the signal is entered in the
image processor. Signal discrimination is carried out in the image processor.
3.3 Video signal processor block
After termination, the Composite Video signal, and the S Video signal are entered in the digital video de-
coder (IC1206: PD64012) through the buffer circuit. In the digital video decoder, NTSC, PAL, SECAM,
and such video signals are converted and decoded into digital signals (brightness and chroma) and the
resultant signals are entered in the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) together with the horizontal and
vertical sync signals.
The video decoder is controlled by the image processor through I
2
C.
3.4 Audio I/O processor (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
The audio signals are once entered in the attenuator, and then entered in the audio AMP (IC2208:
TPA3007D1). The audio signal output from this AMP is generated from the internal speaker (7W max.).
The audio amp is controlled by the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) through the I
2
C.
3.4 Audio I/O processor (Applicable to NP216)
The audio signals are once entered in the attenuator, and then entered in the audio AMP (IC2208:
TPA3007D1). The audio signal output from this AMP is generated from the internal speaker (7W max.).
The audio amp is controlled by the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) through the I
2
C.
When a cable is connected to the Audio Out terminal, the internal speakers are muted and only the L/R
signal output from the Audio Processor IC is available at the Audio Out terminal.
When the PJ standby mode is set at NORMAL, the Audio Out output can be generated. However, in the
case of Power-Saving setup, no output is available upon being transferred to the Power-Saving mode.
8-4
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.5 Plug & Play
The serial terminal of 12, 15pin of Mini D-SUB15 are connected to the EEPROM (IC1003: IS24C02D) for
Plug & Play, so that the projector can be detected at the PC.
3.6 Protector
If any one of the conditions below is sensed, the projector causes the status LED to blink and is restored
to the standby condition.
Detection of lamp cover removal (Cycle of once)
Detection of unusual temperature by the thermal sensor and bimetal (cycle of twice)
Detection of fan (x2) stop (Cycle of 4 times)
Detection of lamps failure in lighting (Cycle of 6 times)
3.7 Image processor (CPU, video signal processing)
The image processor (IC1401: DDP2230) is an LSI where the CPU, the video signal processor circuit,
and the DLP data processor are gathered together. This processor is in charge of video signal process-
ing, generation of DMD driver sequence signals, peripheral controls, and various controls of the projec-
tor.
The programs and the data operated in the CPU are stored in the 64bit Flash ROM (IC2004: MX-
29LV640) and the 32kbit EEPROM (IC1402: IS24C32C). The SRAM (IC2001: IS62WV12816BLL) is
used as a work memory.
The RGB signals and the Component signals are fed from the A/D converter in the form of 8bit x 3 (R/
G/B or Y/Cb/Cr or Y/Pb/Pr). The video signals are fed from the video decoder in the form of 8bit x 2 (601
Y/Cb,Cr). The video output is fed to PORT1 of the image processor.
The input video signals pass through the various processing sections of resolution conversion, compli-
ance IP conversion, OSD processing, correction, color management, etc., and are then converted into
the DMD data by format conversion, and fed to the DMD (P09701: 0.55XGA DMD) circuit.
As a processing memory for format conversion and motion compliance IP conversion, the XDR
(IC1604:K4Y50084) is controlled by the image processor. Based on the clock signal generated in
the image processor, clock signals are fed from the clock and driver (IC1601:CDCDLP223, IC1603:
CY24272ZXCT) circuit.
The motor driver (IC2602: PMD1000) is in charge of color wheel control. Receiving the control signals
from the DLP data processor, this circuit generates an output to the color wheel. Since the sensor out-
put from the color wheel is fed to the image processor, synchronization can be secured.
The reset IC (IC1801: DAD2000) generates outputs of DMD reset voltages and signals plus power sup-
ply voltages. When the control signals are received from the image processor, the reset voltages are
established and the reset signal output is fed to the DMD.
3.8 1W power saving
When [POWER SAVING] is selected in the standby mode, the normal standby mode is switched over
to the power saving mode within about 10 seconds. Since power consumption is suppressed below
1W in the power saving mode, the power is fed only to the red lights of SUB-CPU (IC2606) and D2411
(Power LED).
Normal start takes place when the POWER button of the remote control and the POWER key of the
main unit are pressed under the power saving mode.

8-5
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3.9 Wired LAN section
The LAN terminal (M8001) is used connected to the wired LAN cable. The connector is of the RJ-45
type applicable to 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX.
The Ethernet signal received through the wired LAN cable is decoded at the LAN control IC: S1S60020
(IC8004). Since this IC does not have any PHY function, however, the Ethernet signals cannot be
decoded directly. Consequently, signals are decoded through the Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI
(IC8001). The decoded data are sent to S1S60020 (IC8004). The signals are then converted into serial
signals by the LAN control IC: S1S60020 (IC8004). Therefore, operation is possible in connection with
DDP2230 through the buffer IC: SN74LVC1G97DCK (IC8006).
In the case of data transmission through the wired LAN cable, the command data are sent from the
LAN control IC: S1S60020 (IC8004) to the Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI (IC8001). The data sent to
the Ethernet PHY are modulated and then transmitted to the PC, etc., through the LAN terminal (M8001).
The Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI (IC8001) is applicable to the Auto MDI/MDI-X functions. Since it
makes a connection by automatic discrimination, it is unnecessary to examine the difference between
straight cable and cross cable.
When PJ error occurs in the PJ or in such a case, mail transmission is still possible with the PC.
3.10 Closed Caption
Speech and words used in broadcast programs are converted into the character info. The output video
signals are superposed on the closed caption signals that are the character info like speech and words
in broadcast programs superposed during the vertical fy-back period (vertical fy-back section of video
signals in analog broadcasting) of vertical sync signals for the composite video and S-video signals.
3.11 I
2
C bus control operation
The image processor (IC1401: DDP2230) controls the following eight devices.
I
2
C bus I/F 1 (BUS No. 1): Normally in operation
I
2
C bus I/F 2 (BUS No. 2): Operation only during Power On
(Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
(Applicable to NP216)
Circuit symbol Item name BUS No. Address (Write) Address (Read) Functions
IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ 2 9Ah 9Bh A/D converter
IC1203 Z8612912SSG 2 28h 29h CC DECODER
IC1206 D64012GJ 2 B8h B9h Video decoder
IC1402 IS24C32C 1 A2h A3h 32Kbit EEPROM
IC1601 CDCDLP223 1 A0h D1h Clock Generator
IC1603 CY2427ZXCT 1 DEh DFh Clock Generator
IC2206 NJW1109V 2 80h 81h Attenuator
IC2606 uPD78F0511AGA 1 60h 61h SUB-CPU
Circuit symbol Item name BUS No. Address (Write) Address (Read) Functions
IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ 2 9Ah 9Bh A/D converter
IC1203 Z8612912SSG 2 28h 29h CC DECODER
IC1206 D64012GJ 2 B8h B9h Video decoder
IC1402 IS24C32C 1 A2h A3h 32Kbit EEPROM
IC1601 CDCDLP223 1 A0h D1h Clock Generator
IC1603 CY2427ZXCT 1 DEh DFh Clock Generator
IC2206 NJW1142AV 1 82h Attenuator
IC2606 uPD78F0511AGA 1 60h 61h SUB-CPU
8-6
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
4. A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
Quanitity Circuit symbol Type discription Explanation
1 IC1003 IS24C02D-2ZL1 EEPROM for PLUG & PLAY
1 IC1004 SN74CBT3306 Bus switch
1 IC1006 NJM2581M 6dB Amp
1 IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ A/D converter
1 IC1203 Z8612912SSG-TR Closed Caption
1 IC1204 NJM2233BV Closed Caption
1 IC1206 Upd64012 Video decorder
1 IC1401 DDP2230 Image processor (CPU built-in scaler)
1 IC1402 IS24C232C-2GLI 32Kbit EEPROM
1 IC1601 CDCDLP223 3.3V Clock Synthesizer
1 IC1603 CY24272ZXCT XDR Clock Generator
1 IC1604 K4Y50084UE 512Mbit XDR DRAM
1 IC1801 DAD2000 Reset IC
1 IC2001 IS62WV12816BLL 2Mbit SRAM
1 IC2004 MX29LV640DBTI 64Mbit Flash memory
1 IC2204 ADM3202ARUZ R-232C driver
1 IC2206 NJW1109V Attenuator
1 IC2208 TPA3007D1PW Audio Amp
1 IC2210 UPC393GR Comparator
1 IC2602 PMD1000 Power and Motor Driver
1 IC2606 UPD78f0511 SUB-CPU
1 IC2610 TC7WB66FK BUS Switch
2 IC1002, IC1205 NJM2884U1 VoltageRegulator
4
IC1001, IC1009,
IC1602, IC2609
NJM2878F3 VoltageRegulator
1 IC1010 TPS60403DBV VoltageRegulator
1 IC1202 NJM2882F15 VoltageRegulator
3 IC2202, IC2403, IC2404 NJM2387ADL3 VoltageRegulator
1 IC2607 ST1S10PUR VoltageRegulator
2 IC1007, IC2611 R200LD10L VoltageRegulator
1 IC901 TSOP34438 Remote Control light Receiver
1 IC902 GP2S27T3 Photo Interrupter
8-7
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
4. A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP216)
Quanitity Circuit symbol Type discription Explanation
2 IC1003, IC1012 IS24C02D-2ZL1 EEPROM for PLUG & PLAY
2 IC1004, IC1013 SN74CBT3306 Sync Select
1 IC1006 NJM2581M 6dB Amp
1 IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ A/D converter
1 IC1011 EL4342IL RGB Select
1 IC1203 Z8612912SSG-TR Closed Caption
1 IC1204 NJM2233BV Closed Caption
1 IC1206 Upd64012 Video decorder
1 IC1401 DDP2230 Image processor (CPU built-in scaler)
1 IC1402 IS24C232C-2GLI 32Kbit EEPROM
1 IC1601 CDCDLP223 3.3V Clock Synthesizer
1 IC1603 CY24272ZXCT XDR Clock Generator
1 IC1604 K4Y50084UE 512Mbit XDR DRAM
1 IC1801 DAD2000 Reset IC
1 IC2001 IS62WV12816BLL 2Mbit SRAM
1 IC2004 MX29LV640DBTI 64Mbit Flash memory
1 IC2204 ADM3202ARUZ R-232C driver
1 IC2205 SN74CBT3125 BUS Switch
1 IC2206 NJW1142AV Attenuator
1 IC2208 TPA3007D1PW Audio Amp
1 IC2210 UPC393GR Comparator
1 IC2602 PMD1000 Power and Motor Driver
1 IC2606 UPD78F0511 SUB-CPU
1 IC2610 TC7WB66FK BUS Switch
2 IC1002, IC1205 NJM2884U1 VoltageRegulator
4
IC1001, IC1009,
IC1602, IC2609
NJM2878F3 VoltageRegulator
1 IC1010 TPS60403DBV VoltageRegulator
3 IC2202, IC2403, IC2404 NJM2387ADL3 VoltageRegulator
1 IC2607 ST1S10PUR VoltageRegulator
2 IC1007, IC2611 PQ200LD10L VoltageRegulator
1 IC801 TSOP34438 Remote Control light Receiver
1 IC802 ITR8307/TR8 Photo Interrupter
8-8
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Processing Device Status Remarks Check Point
POWER ON POWER LED: Lit in Orange Lit in Green POPA

COVERDET Check IC2603_6Pin L (0V) Cover Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) POLB
IC1401_C18Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of Once)

LPHOT Check IC2605_3Pin H (+3.3V) Temperature Error Displayed for L (0V) POBM
IC1401 C25Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of Twice)

PWM Initialization Fan Boot Setup

PS2 : High IC2605_6Pin L H (+3.3V)
IC1401_A21Pin

Ballas Uart Mode Setup Enable Communication command
Lamp Sync Type Setup

Fan Data Setup IC2605_4Pin L H (+3.3V)
Fan Rotation Start

Ballast Palament obtain TH2401

Precool Check IC2408_1Pin +0.04~0.5V Precooling for More Than 0.04V POCW
STATUS LED : Blinking in Green (1-Second Period)

C/W Motor Data Setup IC2602
C/W Rotation Start

Precool Check IC2408_1Pin +0.04~0.5V Precooling for More Than 0.04V
STATUS LED : Blinking in Green (1-Second Period)

FANDET Check IC2408_27Pin H (+3.3V) Fan Error Displayed for L (0V) POFA
IC1401_B18Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 4 Times) POFB

C/W Rotation Check PODB_3Pin Lamp Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) POCW
IC1401_AD26Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times) PODB

LAMPEN : High IC2604_2Pin L H (+3.3V) Lamp Light disposition : 200ms wait PODC
Lamp Lighting IC1401_AA27Pin

LAMPFLAG Check PODC_2Pin L (0V) Lamp Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) PODC
IC1401_AD27Pin STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times)

Lamp Light Status Check Uart command

I2C READY Check Lamp Error Displayed for Abnormality
STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times)

I2C Data Setup

No Signal Display Setup POWER LED: Lit in Green Blinking in Green

Normal Operation POWER LED: Blinking in Green Lit in Green
NP215s Power Up Sequence
9-1
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
1. Diagonal view of the main unit front
9-2
2. LENS CAP/STRAP W/LAMP COVER ASSY/LAMP SASSY
(1) Take out the LENS CAP/STRAP W.
(2) Loosen one screw 1 and remove the LAMP COVER ASSY. Loosen three screws 2 of the LAMP SASSY
and remove the LAMP SASSY.
LAMP COVER ASSY (NP210)
24FU0791
LENS CAP (NP210)
24F45801
LAMP SASSY
(Option)
STRAP W
24J23901
2
1
9-3
3. TOP COVER ASSY/DUCT EXT (NP210)
(1) Remove the six screws 1 and the four screws 2 and the take out the TOP COVER ASSY.
(2) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the DUCT EXT (NP210).
FRONT FRONT
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3
TOP COVER ASSY
9N999251 (NP215/215G)
9N999261 (NP210G)
9N999271 (NP115G)
9N999281 (NP110/110G)
9N999291 (NP215J)
9N999301 (NP210J)
9N999311 (NP115J)
9N999321 (NP110J)
9N999451 (NP216/216G)
9N999461 (NP216J)
SRW006
DUCT EXT (NP210)
24F45761
3
SRW011 1
SRW011 1
SRW011 1
SRW019 2
9-4
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
4. MAIN LAN SASSY/MAIN SPK SASSY
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and the six screws 2 and take out the MAIN LAN SASSY/MAIN SPK SASSY.
FRONT
2 SRW016
2 SRW016
1 SRW012
MAIN LAN SASSY
MAIN SPK SASSY(Applicable to NP216)
2 2 2 2 1
1
2 2
9-5
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
5-1. Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
MAINPWB ASSY/LAM PWB ASSY/SPEAKER
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and six STUD (D-SUB). Take out the MAIN PWB ASSY.
(2) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the LAN PWB ASSY.
(3) Remove the two screws 4 and take out the SPEAKER.
1 SRW013
3 SRW014
1 SRW013
SHIELD (I/O) (NP210)
24H66591
BRACKET (I/O) (NP210)
24H66582
2 STUD (D-SUB)
4 SRW017
2 STUD (D-SUB)
LAN PWB ASSY
81S35N01
(Applicable to NP215 series)
MAIN PWB ASSY
(Refer to P5-16)
SPEAKER
6N300029
9-6
5-2. Applicable to NP216
MAIN SASSY/SPEAKER
(1) Remove the two screws 4 and take out the SPEAKER.
MAIN SASSY
81T45FA1 (USA version)
81T46FA1 (USA other than USA version)
SPEAKER
6N300029
4 SRW017
9-7
(1) Take out the LENS GUARD (NP210).
(2) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the SHIELD (DMD) (NP210).
(3) Remove the one screw 2 and take out the CWC PWB ASSY.
(4) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the ENGINE ASSY.
6. LENS GUARD (NP210)/SHIELD (DMD) (NP210)/CWC PWB ASSY/ENGINE ASSY
FRONT
3 2 3 1 1
LENS GUARD (NP210)
24F45791
2 SRW111
1 SRW001
3 SRW001
CWC PWB ASSY
81S35FC2
SHIELD (DMD) (NP210)
24H66661
ENGINE ASSY
(Refer to P9-14~P9-18)
9-8
(1) Remove the six screws 1 and take out the CASE (PS) ASSY.
7. CASE (PS) ASSY)
FRONT
1 SRW010
1 1 1 1 1 1
CASE (PS) ASSY
24FU0801 (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
24FU0891 (Applicable to NP216)
9-9
8. DC FAN
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the DC FAN ASSY.
(2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the DC FAN.
FRONT
1 SRW003
HOLDER LAMP FAN
24F45551
2 SRW115
DC FAN
3N170148
DUCT LAMP
24F45501
1 1
9-10
9. COVER PWB ASSY/POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST/DUCT (BS) (NP210)/
CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210)
(1) Remove the one screw 1 and take out the COVER PWB ASSY.
(2) Remove the four screws 2 and take out the assemblies of POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST/DUCT (BS)
(NP210)/CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210).
(3) Remove the DUCT (BS) (NP210) and the three screws 3 and take out the POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST.
FRONT
2 2 2 1 2
DUCT (BS) (NP210)
24F45811
3 SRW005
1 SRW008
POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST
3N101351
COVER PWB ASSY
81S35FD2
24FU0811
2 SRW007
SRW009
2
5
SRW007
9-11
10. POWER SUPPLY-DC
(1) Remove the one screw 1 and the fve screws 2 and take out the POWER SUPPLY-DC.
FRONT
2 SRW004
1 SRW023
2 SRW004
POWER SUPPLY-DC
3N101341
2 2 2 2 1 2
9-12
11. DC FAN/THERMOSTAT
(1) Remove the three screws 1 and take out the DC FAN ASSY.
(2) Remove the one screw 2 and take out the THERMOSTAT.
(3) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the DC FAN.
FRONT
3 SRW118
1
1 1 1
SRW003
2 SRW120
DC FAN
3N170147
HOLDER EX-FAN
24F45452
THERMOSTAT
7N970080
SPRING BM
9-13
12. BOTTOM COVER ASSY
SPRING (FOOT F)
24H66531
FOOT LEVER
24G09301
FOOT F
24F44611
BOTTOM COVER ASSY
9N999371 (NP215)
9N999381 (NP210)
9N999391 (NP115)
9N999401 (NP110)
9N999481 (NP216)
FOOT R
24F45741
SPACER (FOOT R)
24J36881
CUSHION (FOOT F)
24J35431
9-14
(1) Remove the three screws 1 and take out the FOCUS RING.
(2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the ZOOM BASE.
(3) Take out the ZOOM RING/ZOOM LENS.
13. FOCUS RING/ZOOM BASE/ZOOM RING/ZOOM LENS
1 SRW102
2 SRW104
1 SRW102
2 SRW104
ZOOM BASE
24F45531
FOCUS RING
24F45511
ZOOM RING
24F45521
ZOOM LENS
12JT4022
9-15
14. PLATE BL/HOLDER PLATE-BL/PLATE DMD-MASK/DMD/DMD PWB ASSY/
HEATSINK-DMD ASSY
(1) Remove the one screw 1 and take out the PLATE BL/HOLDER PLATE-BL.
(2) Remove the two screws 2 and take out the PLATE DMD-MASK/DMD/DMD PWB ASSY/HEATSINK-DMD
ASSY.
1
3
SRW105
PLATE BL
24H66371
HOLDER PLATE-BL
24F45562
2 SRW101
SPRING DMD
24H66471
HEATSHINK-DMD ASSY
24HS4921
DMD
3N770164 (NP216/215/210)
3N770165 (NP115/110)
DMD PWB ASSY
81S35FB1
PLATE DMD-MASK
24H66461
9-16
15. CW SASSY
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the CW ASSY.
(2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the COLOR WHEEL.
1 1
1
2
SRW109
SRW111
COLOR WHEEL
12JT3011
HOLDER CW
24F45542
9-17
16. COVER ENGINE/MIRROR
(1) Remove the four screws 1 and take out the assemblies of COVER ENGINE/MIRROR.
(2) Remove the SPRING M1 and take out the MIRROR.
1
SPRING-M1
24H66381
1 1 1 1
MIRROR
12JT4041
COVER-ENGINE
24F45461
SRW106
CUSHION (COVER A)
24J24571
9-18
17. LT SASSY/CONDENSER LENS 1/CONDENSER LENS 2/CONDENSER LENS 3
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and the one screw 2 and the take out the SPRING-LT/PLATE MASK-LT/LT
SASSY.
(2) Take out the CONDENSER LENS 1/CONDENSER LENS 2/CONDENSER LENS 3.
1 1 2 3 3
SRW103
LT-SASSY
82S35131
PLATE MASK-LT
24H66411
2 SRW107
1 SRW108
SPRING-LT
24H66401
CONDENSER LENS 1
12JT4051
CONDENSER LENS 2
12JT4061
CONDENSER LENS 3
12JT3952
3
3
SRW103
10-1
DISASSEMBLY
Main body (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110)
STRAP W
24J23901
SRW011
BOTTOM COVER ASSY
9N999371 (NP215)
9N999381 (NP210)
9N999391 (NP115)
9N999401 (NP110)
SRW011
SPRING BM
THERMOSTAT
7N970080
SRW120
LENS CAP (NP210)
24F45801
24FU0791
TOP COVER ASSY
9N999251 (NP215/215G)
9N999261 (NP210G)
9N999271 (NP115G)
9N999281 (NP110/110G)
9N999291 (NP215J)
9N999301 (NP210J)
9N999311 (NP115J)
9N999321 (NP110J)
SRW006
SRW019
DUCT EXT (NP210)
24F45761
SRW111
SRW001
ENGINE ASSY
24H66661
LENS GUARD (NP210)
24F45791
SRW001
CWC PWB ASSY
81S35FC2
LAMP SASSY
(Option)
SRW013
SRW014
SPEAKER
6N300029
BRACKET (I/O) (NP210)
24H66582
SHIELD (I/O) (NP210)
24H66591
SRW005
SRW005
SRW003
DC FAN
3N170147
SRW118
SRW009
SRW004
SRW004
SRW023
24FU0811
SRW007
SRW007
COVER PWB ASSY
81S35FD2
3N101351
DUCT (BS) (NP210)
24F45811
LAN PWB ASSY
81S35N01
(Applicable to NP215 series)
SRW012
SRW010
SRW016 SRW016
STUD (D-SUB)
STUD (D-SUB)
SRW016
SRW017
SRW016
SRW016
SRW115
SRW011
SRW003
DUCT LAMP
24F45501
DC FAN
3N170148
HOLDER LAMP FAN
24F45551
SRW008
POWER SUPPLY-DC
3N101341
HOLDER EX-FAN
24F45452
MAIN PWB ASSY
(Refer to P5-16)
CASE (PS) ASSY
24FU0801
10-2
DISASSEMBLY
Main body (Applicable to NP216)
STRAP W
24J23901
SRW011
BOTTOM COVER ASSY
9N999481 (NP216)
SRW011
SPRING BM
THERMOSTAT
7N970080
SRW120
LENS CAP (NP210)
24F45801
24FU0791
TOP COVER ASSY
9N999451 (NP216/216G)
9N999461 (NP216J)
SRW006
SRW019
DUCT EXT (NP210)
24F45761
SRW111
SRW001
ENGINE ASSY
24H66661
LENS GUARD (NP210)
24F45791
SRW001
CWC PWB ASSY
81S35FC2
LAMP SASSY
(Option)
SPEAKER
6N300029
SRW005
SRW005
SRW003
DC FAN
3N170147
SRW118
SRW009
SRW004
SRW004
SRW023
24FU0811
SRW007
SRW007
COVER PWB ASSY
81S35FD2
3N101351
DUCT (BS) (NP210)
24F45811
SRW012
SRW010
SRW016
SRW016
SRW016
SRW017
SRW016
SRW115
SRW011
SRW003
DUCT LAMP
24F45501
DC FAN
3N170148
HOLDER LAMP FAN
24F45551
SRW008
POWER SUPPLY-DC
3N101341
HOLDER EX-FAN
24F45452
MAIN SASSY
81T45FA1 (USA version)
81T46FA1 (NP215 other than USA version)
CASE (PS) ASSY
24FU0891
10-3
DISASSEMBLY
Engine sassy
FOCUS RING
24F45511
SRW102
SRW102
SRW104
ZOOM BASE
24F45531
ZOOM RING
24F45521
ZOOM LENS
12JT4022
SRW101
SRW105
PLATE BL
24H66371
HOLDER PLATE-BL
24F45562
HEATSINK-DMD ASSY
24HS4921
SPRING DMD
24H66471
DMD PWB ASSY
81S35FB1
COLOR WHEEL
12JT3011
SRW109
SRW111
DMD
3N770164 (NP216/215/210)
3N770165 (NP115/110)
PLATE DMD-MASK
24H66461
SPRING-M1
24H66381
SRW106 SRW108
SRW107
MIRROR
12JT4041
COVER ENGINE
24F45461
CUSHION (COVER A)
24J24571
PLATE MASK-LT
24H66411
LT-SASSY
82S35131
CONDENSER LENS 2
12JT4061
CONDENSER LENS 3
12JT3952
CONDENSER LENS 1
12JT4051
HOLDER CW
24F45542
SPRING-LT
24H66401
11-1
PACKAGING
1. CARTON BOX (1)
Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Q'ty Remarks
1 CARTON BOX (NP215) 24MV2911 1
1
Carton box (NP215) assembly procedures : Bottom plane assembly box
(Applicable to U/G/J version)
Insert 1pc.
Completion
11-2
PACKAGING
2. CARTON BOX (2)
1 PROTECTION BAG 24M16172 1
3 SPACER (NP215) 24MV2901 1
4 SERVICE ENVELOPR SASSY 1
1
2
3
4
Inser a spacer in the carton box and then the set.
(Applicable to U/G version)
Enter the set in the protection bag.
Enter the set on the top of the spacer.
Enter the protection sheet (containing accessories)
Enter accessories.
Accommodation order
Position for REM-T unit accommodation
1. Position for power cord
accommodation
Enter it from the side where
no plug is located.
2. Position for cable RGB accommodation
Enter it so that the plug side positioned on this side.
1 POWER CORD
2 CABLE RGB
3 REM-T HAND UNIT
Enter the set so that the lens section
is positioned near the large hollow
section of the spacer.
Enter a spacer in the carton box.
Enter a spacer so that
its large hollow section
is positioned on the left
side in the recesses.
Put it so that the joint line of the
carton box is positioned on the
left of this side.
11-3
PACKAGING
3. CARTON BOX (3)
1 PROTECTION BAG 24M16172 1
3 SPACER (NP215) 24MV2901 1
4 SOFT CASE (NP110) 24BS8021 1
5 SERVICE ENVELOPE SASSY 1
5
1 2
3
4
Inser a spacer in the carton box and then the set.
(Applicable to J version)
Enter the set in the protection bag.
Enter the set on the top of the spacer. Enter the soft case on the top of the set.
Enter the soft case so that
is lock section is positioned
on the lens side.
Enter accessories.
Enter the carton sheet (containing accessoried).
Position for REM-T
unit accommodation
Press and crush the convex section of the carton
sheet from the right and left toward the center.
Position for power
cord accommodation
Position for cable RGB accommodation
Enter ir in the order of Cable REM-T.
Enter it so that the plug side positioned on this side.
Enter the set so that the lens section
is positioned near the large hollow
section of the spacer.
Enter a spacer in the carton box.
Enter a spacer so that
its large hollow section
is positioned on the left
side in the recesses.
Put it so that the joint line of
the carton box is positioned
on the left of this side.
11-4
PACKAGING
4. CARTON BOX (4)
1 TYPE, PP 60MM*45M (C) 9R030013 1
TYPE, PP 60MM*50M 92203187 OR
1
Applicable to U/G version
Side plate
Applicable to J version
The direction of
the LENS.
50~60mm
Method of tape adhesion conforms to Type I Adhesion.
Tape ashesion on both sides of the center section :
Approx. 50mm~60mm
11-5
PACKAGING
5. LABEL (CARTON)
1 LABEL (CARTON) (NP215) 24L68571 2
1 LABEL (CARTON) (NP215G) 24L68611 2
1 LABEL (CARTON) (NP215J) 24L68941 2
2 SERIAL LABEL 16761791 1
2
1
Stick the label on the carton box.
Joint part of the carton box
Stick [serial label] on the specified place. (1 pc.)
Stick the [label (carton) (NP***)] on the specified position. (2 pcs.)
Note : It shall be stuck so that it covers "[ ]" mark printed on the carton box.
Note : 1. Stick it after confirm that it is the same No. as the
set adhesion.
2. Stick it, adjusted to the printed mark of [", Conceal the "Label" print.
11-6
PACKAGING
6. CARTON SHEET
1 CARTON SHEET (NP215) 24MV2891 1
1
Carton box (NP215) assembly procedures
Fold 4 pcs.
Fold 2 pcs.
J version only, Not folded
Insert 2 pcs.
Insert 2 pcs.
Inset 2 pcs.
Inset 2 pcs.
In regard to the accommodation order for
accessoried, refer to the next page and thereafter.
Inset 2 pcs.
Completed. (Completed after the
accessories have been entered.)
Fold 4 pcs.
Fold 2 pcs.
11-7
PACKAGING
7. ACCESSORIES (U Version)
B
C
A
A
WARRANTY (US) (PORTABLE) 7N8P9621 1
REGISTRATION CARD (USA) C 7N8P1493 1
NP216 QUICK GUIDE (U/G) 7N8N0731 1
2
3
1
NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (U) 7N8N0751 1 4
NP216 CD-ROM 7N951471 1 5
Applicable to NP216/215/110
Enter the accessories in the assembled carton sheet according to the descriptions above.
In regard to the accommodation order, "1" is put on the top and "5" on the bottom in the carton sheet.
* Align the characters so that they are legible correctly.
Stick the label (insta care) (NP215) on the back of the
REM-T HAND unit RD-445E bag with the cello tape 12W*35M.
(Use the tape by cutting approx. 30~50mm)
Stick the Lable (insta care) (NP215) as face its back side.
Part code Q'ty Storage order Part name
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E 7N900881 1
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (NP215) 24L68581 1
POWER CORD U3 L1.8 V 7N080236 1 B
A
BATTERY CARBON (GP24S) AAA 2
C
CABLE RGB 1.8M JO 7N520052 1
A: Put the REM-T hand unit RD-443E on the spacer in the right recesses of the set.
B: Put the power cord on the spacer in the left recesses of the set.
C: Put the RGB cable on the spacer on the right side of this side of the set.
Insert the battery carbon (GP24S) AAA in the bag of the cable RGB 1.8M.
* For all of A, B, and C, no directions are specified.
Lens position
Confirm all safety marks of the power code.
11-8
PACKAGING
8. ACCESSORIES (G Version)
NP216 QUICK GUIDE (U/G) 7N8N0731 1
NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (G) 7N8N0761 1 3
1
NP216 QUICK GUIDE (G2) 7N8N0741 1 2
NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (U) 7N8N0751 1 4
NP216 CD-ROM 7N951471 1 5
Applicable to NP216/NP215G/210G/115G/110G
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E 7N900881 1
POWER CORD U3 L1.8 10A V 7N080022 1 B
A
C
* For all of A, B, and C, the position for accommodatation identical with that for the
service envelope SASSY of the U version.
11-9
PACKAGING
9. ACCESSORIES (J Version)
A
B
D
C
PROJECTOR WARRANTY (SHEET) 7N8P7491 1
NP216 QUICK FUIDE (J) 7N8N0951 1
NP216 U/M (ABR EDITION) (J) 7N8N0941 1
2
3
1
NP216 CD-ROM 7N951471 1 4
VLC REGISTRATION (C) 7N8P0975 1 5
SERVICE ENVELOPE SASSY
Applicable to NP216J/215J/210J/115J/110J
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-444J 7N900891 1
POWER CORD J3 L3.0 7A V 7N080125 1
B
A
D
C
SOFT CASE (NP110) 24BS8021 1
Lens position
12-1
PART LIST
SPARE PART LIST
NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION PHOTO(or art work) REMARK
1 12JT3011 COLOR WHEEL(PA70)
2 12JT4023 ZOOM LENS(PA91)
3 24F44611 FOOT F(PB90)
4 24F45511 FOCUS_RING(PA91)
5 24F45521 ZOOM_RING(PA91)
6 24F45531 ZOOM_BASE(PA91)
7 24F45542 HOLDER_CW(PA91)
8 24F45741 FOOT R(NP210)
12-2
PART LIST
9 24F45761 DUCT EXT(NP210)
10 24F45791 LENS GUARD(NP210)
11 24F45801 LENS CAP(NP210)
12 24FU0791 LAMP COVER ASSY(NP210)
13 24J23901 STRAP W
14 24J35431 CUSHION (FOOT F)(PB90)
15 24L46401 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
16
24L69771 LABEL (CARTON)(NP216) (example:NP215) NP216 ONLY
24L68571 LABEL(CARTON)(NP215) NP215 ONLY
17 24L68581 LABEL(INSTA CARE)(NP215)
12-3
PART LIST
18 24M16172 PROTECTION BAG
19 24MV2891 CARTON SHEET(NP215)
20 24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
21 24MV2911 CARTON BOX(NP215)
22 3N101341 POWER SUPPLY-DC PA91
23 3N101351 POWERSUPPLY-BALLAST PA91
24 3N170147 DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
25 3N170148 DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
26
3N770164 MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9) NP215/NP216 ONLY
3N770165 MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9) NP110/NP115 ONLY
12-4
PART LIST
27 6N300029 SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K
28 7N080236 POWER CORD U3 L1.8 V
29 7N520052 CABLE RGB 1.8M JO
30 7N8P1493 REGISTRATION CARD(USA)C
31 7N8P9621 WARRANTY(US)(PORTABLE)
32 7N8N0731 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
33 7N8N0751 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(U)
34 7N900881 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E
35 7N951471 NP216 CD-ROM
12-5
PART LIST
36 7N970080 THERMOSTAT UP62G-90 L130B
37
MAIN PWB ASSY
NP215/NP115/NP110 ONLY
In regard to the part numbers, refer to
Method of Adjustments on P5-16.
81T45FA1 MAIN SASSY NP216 ONLY
38 81S35FB1 DMD PWB ASSY
39 81S35FC1 CWC PWB ASSY
40 81S35FD1 COVER PWB ASSY
41 82S35131 LT_SASSY
42
9N999452 TOP COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216 ONLY
43
9N999481 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216 ONLY
12-6
PART LIST
44 81S35N01 LAN_PWB PWB ASSY NP215 ONLY
12-7
PART LIST
SPARE PART LIST
NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G
3 24F44611 FOOT F(PB90)
8 24F45741 FOOT R(NP210)
12-8
PART LIST
9 24F45761 DUCT EXT(NP210)
11 24F45801 LENS CAP(NP210)
13 24J23901 STRAP W
16
24L69781 LABEL (CARTON)(NP216G) (example:NP215) NP216G ONLY
24L68611 LABEL(CARTON)(NP215G) NP215G ONLY
12-9
PART LIST
19 24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
23 3N170147 DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
24 3N170148 DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
25
3N770164 MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9) NP216G/NP215G/NP210G ONLY
3N770165 MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9) NP115G/NP110G ONLY
26 6N300029 SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K
12-10
PART LIST
27 7N080022 POWER CORD E3 L1.8 10A V
29 7N8N0731 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
30 7N8N0741 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(G2)
31 7N8N0751 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(U)
32 7N8N0761 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(G)
34 7N951471 NP216 CD-ROM
12-11
PART LIST
36
MAIN PWB ASSY
NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G ONLY
81T46FA1 MAIN SASSY NP216G ONLY
41
9N999452 TOP COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216G ONLY
42
9N999481 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216G ONLY
43 81S35N01 LAN_PWB PWB ASSY NP215G ONLY
12-12
PART LIST
SPARE PART LIST
NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J
24BS8021 SOFT CASE(NP100)
3 24F44611 FOOT F(PB90)
12-13
PART LIST
8 24F45741 FOOT R(NP210)
9 24F45761 DUCT EXT(NP210)
11 24F45801 LENS CAP(NP210)
13 24J23901 STRAP W
16
24L70051 LABEL (CARTON)(NP216J) (example:NP215) NP216J ONLY
24L68941 LABEL(CARTON)(NP215J) NP215J ONLY
12-14
PART LIST
19 24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
23 3N170147 DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
24 3N170148 DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
25
3N770164 MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9) NP216J/NP215J/NP210J ONLY
3N770165 MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9) NP115J/NP1110J ONLY
12-15
PART LIST
26 6N300029 SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K
27 7N080125 POWER CORD J3 L3.0 7A V
29 7N8P0975 VLC REGISTRATION(C)
30 7N8P7491 PROTECTOR WARRANTY(SHEET)
31 7N8N0951 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(J)
32 7N8N0941 NP216 U/M(ABR EDITION)(J)
34 7N951471 NP216 CD-ROM
12-16
PART LIST
36
MAIN PWB ASSY
NP216J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J ONLY
81T45FA1 MAIN SASSY NP216J ONLY
41
9N999462 TOP COVER ASSY(NP216J) NP216J ONLY
42
9N999481 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216) NP216J ONLY
12-17
PART LIST
43 81S35N01 LAN_PWB PWB ASSY NP215J ONLY

LAMP UNIT
NP215s CONNECTION DIAGRAM
MAIN PWB
(PWC 4719A)
7W SPEAKER

Sirocco
Air
Flow
Color Wheel Unit
DMD PWB
(PWC 4719B)
DC POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
BALLAST POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
LAN PWB
(PWC 4695)
CWC PWB
(PWC 4719C)
DET PWB
(PWC 4719D)
BIMETAL
90C/60C
VCCS+6.5V
GND
VCCS+15
VCCS+15
GND
GND
PFC_ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LAMP_DET/RXD
GND
VCSM+3.3V
LAMP_EN/SCI
LAMP_PW/TXD
1
2
3
4
5
+3.3V
GND
TXD
RXD
RESET
FWRITE
INIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VCC_FANA
GND
FANA TACH
1
2
3
VCC_FANB
GND
FANB TACH
PS_OUT
PS_IN
1
2
AUD+
AUD-
1
2
PODC
1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS)
7N400514
POPA
2.0mm 7P (A2001WR0-7PS)
7N400502
PORJ
1.5mm 7P (A1501WV0-7PS)
7N400516
POFA
1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS)
7N400512
POBM
2.0mm 2P (A2001WR0-2PS)
7N400351
POFB
1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS)
7N400512
POF01
1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003)
7N400625
POF02
1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003-PCB)
-NC-
POCW
1.0mm 4P (04FMN-BMTR-A-TB(LF)(SN))
7N400624
PODB
1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS)
7N400514
PODB2
2.0mm 5P (05P-SAN)
7NH5W001
POSP
1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS)
7N400511
GND
COVERDE
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
POLB
1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS)
7N400511
OUTA
OUTB
OUTC
CENTER
1
2
3
4
P3P3V
GND
CWINDEX
RA
3.3VSCP
1
2
3
4
5
+3.3V
GND
TXD
RXD
RESET
FWRITE
INIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P3P3V
GND
CWINDEX
RA
3.3VSCP
1
2
3
4
5
1 2
3 4
75 76
77 78
PO**
2.0mm 7P
(B7B-PH-K-S)
PO**
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH)
X**
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH)
X**
3.96mm 4P (B2P4-VH)
X**
1.25mm 5P
(SM05B-GHS-TB)
55mm
50mm
135mm
115mm
160mm
80mm
130mm
200mm
105mm
175mm+ (Core)
Card
Edge
180mm
130mm
79mm
3239O-20
3239O-2
1061-28
1061-24
1685-26
3266-24
1061-28
3443-28
1685-28
1685-26
3443-28
1015-22
Lamp House
POLA
2.0mm 7P (07P-SAN)
7NW7W032
POLB2
2.0mm 2P (02P-SJN)
7NH2W002 1
2
1 P3P3V
3 P3P3V
5 GND
7 MBRST[8]
9 MBRST[9]
11 MBRST[10]
13 MBRST[11]
15 MBRST[12]
17 MBRST[13]
19 MBRST[14]
21 MBRST[15]
23 GND
25 SSP0_TXD
27 SSP0_RXD
29 GND
31 SSP0_CLK
33 GND
35 DDB_P_1
37 DDB_N_1
39 DDB_P_3
41 DDB_N_3
43 GND
45 SCB_P
47 SCB_N
49 DDB_P_5
51 DDB_N_5
53 DDB_P_7
55 DDB_N_7
57 DDA_P_6
59 DDA_N_6
61 DDA_P_4
63 DDA_N_4
65 GND
67 SCA_P
69 SCA_N
71 DDA_P_2
73 DDA_N_2
75 DDA_P_0
2 VCC2
4 GND
6 GND
8 MBRST[7]
10 MBRST[6]
12 MBRST[5]
14 MBRST[4]
16 MBRST[3]
18 MBRST[2]
20 MBRST[1]
22 MBRST[0]
24 GND
26
SSP0_CSZ1
28
EXT_ARSTZ
30 GND
32 GND
34 GND
36 DDB_P_0
38 DDB_N_0
40 DDB_P_2
42 DDB_N_2
44 GND
46 DCKB_P
48 DCKB_N
50 DDB_P_4
52 DDB_N_4
54 DDB_P_6
56 DDB_N_6
58 DDA_P_7
60 DDA_N_7
62 DDA_P_5
64 DDA_N_5
66 GND
68 DCKA_P
70 DCKA_N
72 DDA_P_3
77 DDA_N_0 74 DDA_N_3
76 DDA_P_1
78 DDA_N_1
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2M-1*)
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2F-1*)
1
2
3
1 2
3 4

75 76
77 78
Applicable to NP215
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
13-1
"Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC"
LAMP UNIT
NP216 CONNECTION DIAGRAM

Sirocco
Air
Flow
Color Wheel Unit
LAN PWB
(PWC 4695)
CWC PWB
(PWC 4719C)
(PWC 4732C)
DET PWB
(PWC 4719D)
(PWC 4732D)

+3.3V
GND
TXD
RXD
RESET
FWRITE
INIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
77 78
PODB2
2.0mm 5P (05P-SAN)
7NH5W001
P3P3V
GND
CWINDEX
RA
3.3VSCP
1
2
3
4
5
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2F-1*)
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2M-1*)
50mm

80mm
175mm+ (Core)
Card
130mm
79mm
3239O-20
3239O-2
1015-22
Lamp House
POLB2
2.0mm 2P (02P-SJN)
7NH2W002
1
2
IO PWB (PWC 4733)
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
1 R_OUT
3 G_OUT
5 B_OUT
7 V_OUT
9 H_OUT
11 RXD_P
13 TXD_P
15 J_SW
17 A_R_OUT
19 A_L_OUT
2 GND
4 GND
6 GND
8 GND
10 GND
12 GND
14 GND
16 GND
18 GND
20 GND
BIMETAL
90C/60C
BALLAST POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
1
2
3
4
5
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH)
3.96mm 4P (B2P4-VH)
X**
X**
X**
1.25mm 5P
(SM05B-GHS-TB)
DC POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
PO**
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH) 2.0mm 7P
(B7B-PH-K-S)
PO**
MAIN PWB
(PWC 4732A)
VCCS+6.5V
GND
VCCS+15
VCCS+15
GND
GND
PFC_ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LAMP_DET/RXD
GND
VCSM+3.3V
LAMP_EN/SCI
LAMP_PW/TXD
1
2
3
4
5
VCC_FANA
GND
FANA_TACH
1
2
3
VCC_FANB
GND
FANB_TACH
1
2
3
PS_OUT
PS_IN
1
2
1 2
3 4

75 76
77 78
1 2
3 4

75 76
AUD+
AUD-
1
2
PODC
1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS)
7N400549
POPA
2.0mm 7P (A2001WR0-7PS)
7N400356
PORJ
1.5mm 7P (A1501W0-7PS)
7N400551
POFA
1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS)
7N400547
POBM
2.0mm 2P (A2001WR0-2PS)
7N400351
POFB
1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS)
7N400547
POF01
1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003)
7N400625
POCW
1.0mm 4P (04FMN-BMTR-A-TB(LF)(SN))
7N400624
PODB
1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS)
7N400549
POSP
1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS)
7N400546
GND
COVERDET
1
2
POLB
1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS)
7N400546
OUTA
OUTB
OUTC
CENTER
1
2
3
4
P3P3V
GND
CWINDEX
RA
3.3VSCP
1
2
3
4
5
+3.3V
GND
TXD
RXD
RESET
FWRITE
INIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
55mm
135mm
115mm
160mm
130mm
200mm
105mm
Edge
180mm
1061-28
1061-24
1685-26
3266-24
1061-28
3443-28
1685-28
1685-26
3443-28
POLA
2.0mm 7P (07P-SAN)
7NW7W032
POMI
2.0mm 20P
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
DMD PWB
(PWC 4719B)
(PWC 4732B)
POF02
1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003-PCB)
-NC-
1 P3P3V
3 P3P3V
5 GND
7 MBRST[8]
9 MBRST[9]
11 MBRST[10]
13 MBRST[11]
15 MBRST[12]
17 MBRST[13]
19 MBRST[14]
21 MBRST[15]
23 GND
25 SSP0_TXD
27 SSP0_RXD
29 GND
31 SSP0_CLK
33 GND
35 DDB_P_1
37 DDB_N_1
39 DDB_P_3
41 DDB_N_3
43 GND
45 SCB_P
47 SCB_N
49 DDB_P_5
51 DDB_N_5
53 DDB_P_7
55 DDB_N_7
57 DDA_P_6
59 DDA_N_6
61 DDA_P_4
63 DDA_N_4
65 GND
67 SCA_P
69 SCA_N
71 DDA_P_2
73 DDA_N_2
75 DDA_P_0
77 DDA_N_0
2 VCC2
4 GND
6 GND
8 MBRST[7]
10 MBRST[6]
12 MBRST[5]
14 MBRST[4]
16 MBRST[3]
18 MBRST[2]
20 MBRST[1]
22 MBRST[0]
24 GND
26
SSP0_CSZ1
28
EXT_ARSTZ
30 GND
32 GND
34 GND
36 DDB_P_0
38 DDB_N_0
40 DDB_P_2
42 DDB_N_2
44 GND
46 DCKB_P
48 DCKB_N
50 DDB_P_4
52 DDB_N_4
54 DDB_P_6
56 DDB_N_6
58 DDA_P_7
60 DDA_N_7
62 DDA_P_5
64 DDA_N_5
66 GND
68 DCKA_P
70 DCKA_N
72 DDA_P_3
74 DDA_N_3
76 DDA_P_1
78 DDA_N_1
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
13-2
NP215s BLOCK DIAGRAM
Computer IN
IC1003
TC9WMB1FK
P&P
IC1004
SN74CBT3306
BUS
SWITCH
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
V SYNC
H SYNC
RGB or COMPONENT
24.576MHz
PC
CONTROL
AUDIO IN
V
H
IC1402
M24C32
32K EEPROM
CVBS
SV-C
RXD/TXD
RGB/
YUV
YUV
CLK,HD,VD
CLK,HS,VS
SPEAKER 7W
IC1401
DDP2230
IC2004
M29W640GB
FLASH ROM
IC2001
CY62137FV30
SRAM
IC1801
DAD2000
DMD CONTROL
IC1601
CDCDLP223
IC1604
EDX5116ACSE
XDR DRAM
RGB/YUV
CLK/HS/VS
H
V
LDE
LVDS
20pair
I2C
BIMETAL
PS/BALLAST
I2CS
+15V
MAIN PWB
IC1603
CDCD5704
XCG
20MHz
100MHz 400MHz
20MHz
320MHz
16
LAMP
UNIT
KEY
MATRIX
KEY/LED
r
p
m
*
2
P
W
M
*
2
BALLAST
Control
IC1206
PD64012
VIDEO
DECODER
I2CS
IC2606
uPD78F0511
SUB CPU
RXD/TXD
L/R
RESET
BEEP
Computer OUT
DET PWB
LAMP
COVER
SW
2X LVDS
DMD
Series450
R
X
D
/
T
X
D
IC2205
SN74CBT3125
BUS SWITCH
(Option)
IC1203
Z8612912SSG
Closed Caption
(Option)
IC1204
NJM2233BV
Sig. SEL
(Option)
SV-Y
IC1006
NJM2581M
6dB Amp.
IC1008
AD9883
A/D
CONVERTER
IC2602
PMD1000
IC2601
PQ200WNA
Reg.
Pre-
Cooling
Cir.
+15V
+12V
ENABLE
IR
i t
Drive
Circuit

FANB

N
FANA
+6.5V
IR
CWC-REM PWB

IC2210
UPC393GR
COMPARATOR
POWER
KEY
IC2206
NJW1109V
Attenuator
IC2208
TPA3007D1PW
Audio Amp.
+/-
LAN PWB
(Option)
IC2204
ADM3202
RS-232C
DRIVER
I2C
IC2402/5
AMC6821
FAN Control
(Back up)
Therm.
(Intake)
Therm.
(Exhaust)
ADC ADC ADC
DMD PWB
BLOCK DIAGRAM
14-1
2X LVDS
DMD
Series450
DMD PWB
NP216 BLOCK DIAGRAM
100HMz
BALLAST
Control
IC1401
DDP2230
IC1801
DAD2000
DMDCONTROL
IC1603
CDCD5704
XCG
CDCDLP223
IC1604
K4Y50084UE
XDR DRAM
IC2210
UPC393GR
COMPARATOR
IC2602
PMD1000
ADC ADC ADC
IC2606
uPD78F0511
SUB CPU
Pre-Cooling
Cir.
Therm.
(Intake)
Therm.
(Exhaust)
POWER
KEY
IC2208
TPA3007D1PW
Audio Amp.
IC2206
NJW1142V
Attenuator
IC2205
SN74CBT3125
BUS SWITCH
IC2204
ADM3202
RS-232C
DRIVER
IC1204
NJM2233BV
Sig. SEL
(Option)
IC1203
Z8612912SSG
Closed Caption
(Option)
IC1206
PD64012
VIDEO
DECODER
24.576MHz
IC1402
M24C32
32K EEPROM
IC2001
CY62137FV30
SRAM
IC1008
AD9985AKSTZ
A/D
CONVERTER
IC1013
SN74CBT3306C
SYNC SEL.
IC1006
NJM2581M
6dB Amp.
IC1003
IS24C02D
P&P
IC2601
PQ200WNA
Reg.
Drive
Circuit
IC2004
MX29LV640DBTI
FLASH ROM
Tr
Tr
LVDS
20pair
KEY
MATRIX
LED
I2CS
400MHz
320MHz
20MHz
+15V
+6.5V
+15V
+12V
ENABLE
IR
RGB/YUV
CLK/HS/VS
RGB/YUV
CLK/HS
/VS
YUV
CLK/HD/VD
P
W
M
*
2
r
p
m
*
2
SPEAKER 7W
RXD/TXD
I2CS
I2CS2
R
X
D
/
T
X
D
PC CONTROL
S-VIDEO
IN
Computer1
Audio_In
Computer2
Audio_In
Video
Audio_In
Audio_Out
MAIN PWB
VIDEO
IN
IC1011
EL4342IL
RGB SEL.
IC1012
IS24C02D
P&P
Computer OUT
Computer IN1
Computer IN 2
V1 SYNC
H1 SYNC
RGB1
RGB2
A
_
M
U
T
E
A_MUTE2
L/R OUT
L/R IN1
L/R IN2
J_SW
L/R OUT
A_MUTE2
RGB_SEL1
RGB_SEL2
IO PWB
VCCS+5V
IC1004
SN74CBT3306C
SYNC SEL.
H2 SYNC
V2 SYNC
H SYNC
V SYNC
VCCS+5V
CVBS
SV-Y
SV-C
RXD/TXD
BEEP
+/-
L/R
IN
GND: 10
IC2610
TC7WB66FK
I2C SW
Tr
L : JACK_IN/
H: JACK_OFF
I2CS
D
C
IC2607
ST1S10PUR
I2CS2
14-2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
IC1601
20MHz
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.
15-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-5
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-6
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-7
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-8
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-9
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-11
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-12
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-13
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-14
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-15
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-16
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-17
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-18
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-19
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-20
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-21
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-22
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-23
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-24
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-25
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-26
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
15-27

Service Manual NP215s NP216

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual NP215s NP216

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAFETY CAUTION:

Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service

projector with high resolution and high brightness

To turn on the [ECO MODE], do the following:

Link compatible LCD shutter eye-

Link system are used for viewing 3D images by syn-

Link to view 3D images [DLP Link]

Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses, select [ON].

Link, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may not

Link], this function is not available.

Link to view 3D images [DLP Link]

Link system between ON and OFF.

Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses, select [ON].

Link, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may not synchronize to the

chip (0.55", aspect 4:3)

Blinking light Red 1 cycle (0.5 sec

Rouge [CONOMIE D'NERGIE] est slectionn pour le

Rojo Se selecciona [AHORRO DE ENERGA] para

Naranja La funcin [BLOQ. PANEL DE CONT.] est

Adjust the tilt foot

Adjust the picture size and position.

( page 23 of the Users Manual)

You might also like